JP2023142708A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide an improved game machine regarding a performance when a game medium enters a start area.SOLUTION: A game machine includes game control means for performing control regarding progress of a game, especially a variable display and reservation storage, performance control means for performing control regarding a performance according to an instruction from the game control means, and display control means for controlling a liquid crystal display device, and can perform a specific display corresponding to the variable display corresponding to an instruction from the game control means and a reservation display corresponding to reservation storage.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player.

Conventional gaming machines are capable of executing variable displays and can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player. When an event occurs, there is a device that can display an appearance animation in which a pending display based on the pending memory is displayed in stages (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-97173

However, Patent Document 1 has a problem in that there is room for improvement regarding the specific display corresponding to the variable display, the pending display, and the control regarding the specific display and the pending display.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is improved in terms of pending display.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention includes:
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
comprising a storage means;
The performance control means is
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
It is possible to display a demonstration display,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
It is possible to display the demonstration display when the storage means does not store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
If a game medium passes through the starting area while displaying the demonstration display, the display of the demonstration display is ended, and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area. , starting a movement animation for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area from the next switching cycle after displaying the specific display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the demonstration display is released, the specific display is once displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area, and then moved to the display position corresponding to the variable display storage area. Therefore, it is possible to easily convey that the game medium has passed through the starting area during the demonstration display, and as a result, a suitable game environment can be provided.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view showing a gaming machine in an example. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the circuit configuration of the main board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of each drawing area. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. It is an explanatory diagram showing a losing performance determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a normal state, (B) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a time saving state, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a variable probability state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of a variation pattern determination table for failure. (A) to (D) are explanatory diagrams of a variation pattern determination table for failure. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams of a variation pattern determination table for failure. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams of a jackpot variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram of each game state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the special symbol unit, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display of the special symbol, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the presentation display unit, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display of the special symbol. It is an explanatory diagram of a display. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an input port. It is an explanatory diagram showing an output port. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing 2-byte buffers each formed in a RAM used in switch processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of switch processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of random number update processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting port switch passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol buffer shift processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display processing. It is an explanatory view of lighting control mode of each hold indicator. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol display control processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display control processing. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the command transmission timing due to the occurrence of a starting prize and the start timing of the light emission control of the hold display, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the command transmission timing at the start of variable display and the state after subtracting the number of hold memories of the hold display. (C) is an explanatory diagram of the emission control start timing of the special symbol and the subtraction start timing of the variable display time at the start of the variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram of a production mode change opportunity in production mode decision processing. It is an explanatory diagram of whether or not to execute a pending change performance and the determination ratio of a performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of flash effect processing at the time of winning a prize. It is an explanatory diagram of the ratio of determining whether or not to execute a flash effect at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of button vibration production processing. It is an explanatory view of lighting control mode of each sub-hold indicator. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the processing cycle of the CPU and the CPU for effect control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the animation execution period for each effect mode. (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in production mode A, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in production mode B, and (C1 ) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in production mode C, and (D1) and (D2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in production mode D. It is an explanatory view showing appearance animation in production mode A. It is an explanatory view showing appearance animation in production mode A. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a movement mode of a hold display in an appearance animation in production mode A. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing a shift animation. It is an explanatory diagram showing appearance animation in production mode B. It is an explanatory diagram showing appearance animation in production mode B. It is an explanatory diagram showing an appearance animation in production mode C. It is an explanatory diagram showing an appearance animation in production mode D. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a staying animation in production mode A, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a staying animation in production mode B. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in production mode A, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in production mode B, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in production mode C. , (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the end animation in production mode D. It is an explanatory view showing a shift animation in production mode A. It is an explanatory view showing a shift animation in production mode A. It is an explanatory diagram showing a shift animation in production mode B. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the active display area and the pending display area in each production mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of animation in each production mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an appearance animation when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is one or more. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an appearance animation when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is one or more. It is an explanatory diagram of an appearance animation when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0. It is an explanatory diagram of an appearance animation when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated during a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, and the appearance animation is started at a timing 660 ms or more before the start of the next variable display. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated during a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, and the appearance animation is started at a timing less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated during a shift animation after the end of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 and after the start of the next variable display. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a case where pending storage occurs at a timing within 33 ms after the start of the next variable display after the completion of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 1 to 3. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs at a timing of less than 33 ms until the start of the next variable display after the end of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 1 to 3. It is an explanatory diagram when a new start winning prize occurs during a variable display in which the number of pending memories is four. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory is generated in the shift animation space of the next variable display after the end of the variable display where the number of pending memories is four. It is an explanatory diagram when a new starting winning occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display with the number of pending memories being 4. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs within 33 ms from the start of the next variable display after the end of the variable display in which the number of pending memories is 4. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated during a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 0, and the appearance animation is started at a timing of 660 ms or more until the start of the next variable display. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated during a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 0, and an appearance animation is started at a timing of less than 660 ms until the start of the next variable display. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs at a timing of less than 33 ms after the end of the symbol determination period of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 0. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs at a timing of less than 33 ms until the end of the symbol determination period of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 0. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs at a timing of 33 ms or more after the end of the symbol determination period of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 0. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram regarding variable display start timing when a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 0 and variable display is not being executed; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram regarding variable display start timing when a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 0 and variable display is not being executed; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of a pending display and a pending display when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory is generated during execution of variable display. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of a pending display and a pending display when the number of pending memories is 1 and a new pending memory is generated during execution of variable display. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of a pending display and a pending display when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory is generated during execution of variable display. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of a pending display and a pending display when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory is generated during execution of variable display. It is a comparison diagram of each production. It is an explanatory diagram when storing the random number value extracted in the starting port switch passing process. It is an explanatory diagram of special buffer shift processing. It is an explanatory diagram of special buffer shift processing. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in production mode C or production mode D. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in production mode C or production mode D. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in production mode C or production mode D. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a case where pending storage occurs continuously. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 0 and variable display is not executed;

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples. In the following embodiments, the "variable display" of special symbols and decorative symbols may be referred to as "variable display" or simply "variation."

[Form 1]
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
When the N time variable display of the number of pending memories ends and a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72 to 74
In addition, in this embodiment,
The “advantageous state” corresponds to the “jackpot gaming state” in this embodiment,
"Game control means" corresponds to "CPU 103" in this embodiment,
The "effect execution means" corresponds to the "presentation control CPU 120" in this embodiment,
The "retention storage means" corresponds to the "first special symbol buffer 001SG151" and "second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment,
The "predetermined number" corresponds to "the number of first special figure reservation memory and the number of second special figure reservation memory is four" in this embodiment,
The "start mode" corresponds to the "holding display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
The "completion mode" corresponds to the "suspension display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation" in this embodiment,
The "midway mode" corresponds to the "suspended display displayed as an image from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
“Pending shift” corresponds to “shift animation” in this embodiment,
The “specific period” corresponds to “330 ms, which is the display execution period of the shift animation” in this embodiment,
The "predetermined period" corresponds to "660 ms, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
The "hold display position" corresponds to the "hold storage display area 5U" in this embodiment.

[Form 2]
Type 2 gaming machine is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76

[Form 3]
Type 3 gaming machine is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. Starting with the start mode, changing from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and in a situation where the intermediate mode is different from the pre-completion mode, the next variable display is started. By changing the completion mode based on the timing, the pending display is displayed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82

[Form 4]
Type 4 gaming machine is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and the new pending memory is not immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends. In this case, the pending display is started in the starting mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the pending display is changed from the starting mode to an intermediate mode that is different from the pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display is started in the situation where the mode is set, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends. In this case, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is finished, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0. Display from aspect,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 72, Fig. 73, Fig. 75, Fig. 76, Fig. 81 to Fig. 84
In addition, in this embodiment,
"Immediately before the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "timing of less than 33 ms until the variable display with the number of pending memories of 0 ends".
"Immediately after the variable display with the number of pending memories of 0 ends" corresponds to "timing less than 33 ms after the variable display of the number of pending memories of 0 ends".

[Form 5]
Type 5 gaming machine is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
When the N time variable display of the number of pending memories ends and a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
Starting the hold display in the start mode than the display area used for displaying the hold display during the period from displaying the hold display in the completion mode until reaching the hold shift start timing, and starting the hold display in the start mode. The display area used in the stepwise change from to the plurality of intermediate modes and then to the completed mode is larger;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change the game, and the player can see the gradual change. Furthermore, even if the new pending display overlaps with the already displayed pending display, the display area used for the gradual change of the new pending display is wider, so the player cannot can recognize retained memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 56, Figure 72 to Figure 74

[Form 6]
Type 6 gaming machine is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
Starting the hold display in the start mode than the display area used for displaying the hold display during the period from displaying the hold display in the completion mode until reaching the hold shift start timing, and starting the hold display in the start mode. The display area used in the stepwise change from to the plurality of intermediate modes and then to the completed mode is larger;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change the game, and the player can see the gradual change. Furthermore, even if the new pending display overlaps with the already displayed pending display, the display area used for the new pending display is wider, so the player will not be placed on hold. Can recognize memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 56, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76

[Form 7]
Type 7 gaming machine is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
When the N time variable display of the number of pending memories ends and a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. Starting with the start mode, changing from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and in a situation where the intermediate mode is different from the pre-completion mode, the next variable display is started. By changing the completion mode based on the timing and displaying the pending display,
Starting the hold display in the start mode than the display area used for displaying the hold display during the period from displaying the hold display in the completion mode until reaching the hold shift start timing, and starting the hold display in the start mode. The display area used in the stepwise change from to the plurality of intermediate modes and then to the completed mode is larger;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. It is possible to show the player a gradual change without the need for change, and when the hold display that has already been displayed at the hold display position corresponding to the Nth number is moved, the new hold display position corresponding to the Nth number is moved. Even if the hold display displayed on the screen overlaps, the newly displayed hold display uses a wider display area, so the newly displayed hold display is easier to visually recognize and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, even if the new pending display overlaps with the already displayed pending display, the display area used for the new pending display is wider, so the player will not be placed on hold. Can recognize memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 56, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82

[Form 8]
Type 8 gaming machine is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and the new pending memory is not immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends. In this case, the pending display is started in the starting mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the pending display is changed from the starting mode to an intermediate mode that is different from the pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display is started in the situation where the mode is set, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends. In this case, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is finished, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0. Displayed from the aspect,
Starting the hold display in the start mode than the display area used for displaying the hold display during the period from displaying the hold display in the completion mode until reaching the hold shift start timing, and starting the hold display in the start mode. The display area used in the stepwise change from to the plurality of intermediate modes and then to the completed mode is larger;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if the number of pending memories has reached the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the pending memory will not be stored until the next variable display starts, so new pending memories will be added in stages. Changes are not executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the newly stored pending memory during the specific period in which the pending display position moves from the start of the variable display to the pending display. Since the display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, there is no need to change the stepwise change to the completion mode, and the stepwise change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if a hold display that has already been displayed at a predetermined number is moved and a hold display that is newly displayed at a predetermined number overlaps, the display area used by the newly displayed hold display is wider. Therefore, the newly displayed pending display can be easily recognized and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, even if the new pending display overlaps with the already displayed pending display, the display area used for the gradual change of the new pending display is wider, so the player cannot can recognize retained memories.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 56, Fig. 72, Fig. 73, Fig. 75, Fig. 76, Fig. 81 to Fig. 84

[Form 9]
Type 9 gaming machine is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute the winning performance,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
When the N time variable display of the number of pending memories ends and a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
When a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display at the time of the number of pending memories N, and when the number of pending memories N If a new pending memory is stored while the time variable display is being executed and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, and if the number of pending memories N time variable display ends. and the entry prize performance can be performed in either case, whether a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change the game, and the player can see the gradual change. Furthermore, since the prize-winning effect can be executed regardless of whether or not there is a change in the completion mode of the stepwise change, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72 to 74, Figure 92
In addition, in this embodiment,
"Winning performance" corresponds to "Flash performance when winning a prize".

[Form 10]
The game machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute the winning performance,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
When a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display at the time of the number of pending memories N, and when the number of pending memories N While a time variable display is being executed, if the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored, and during the execution of the suspended storage number N time variable display, the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, and the next variable display is started. When a new suspended memory is stored during the period immediately before the suspended memory number N time variable display ends and a new suspended memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts. In either case, it is possible to carry out the above-mentioned award performance.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing the new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change the game, and the player can see the gradual change. Furthermore, since the prize-winning performance can be executed regardless of whether or not there is a change in the completion mode of the stepwise change, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76, Figure 92

[Form 11]
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute the winning performance,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. Starting with the start mode, changing from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and in a situation where the intermediate mode is different from the pre-completion mode, the next variable display is started. By changing the completion mode based on the timing and displaying the pending display,
When a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display at the time of the number of pending memories N, and when the number of pending memories N When a new pending memory is stored while the time variable display is being executed and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the number of pending memories is 0 and the time variable display is executed. Among them, when a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories 0 hours ends is longer than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories 0 hours is being executed. , when a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories ends at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period; is practicable,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change it, and it is possible to show the player a gradual change, and even if the pending display that has already been displayed at the Nth position is moved, and the newly displayed pending display that is displayed at the Nth position is superimposed, Since the display area used for the newly displayed hold display is wider, the newly displayed hold display is easier to visually recognize, and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, since the prize-winning effect can be executed regardless of whether or not there is a change in the completion mode of the stepwise change, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82, Figure 92

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute the winning performance,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and the new pending memory is not immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends. In this case, the pending display is started in the starting mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the pending display is changed from the starting mode to an intermediate mode that is different from the pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display is started in the situation where the mode is set, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends. In this case, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is finished, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0. Displayed from the aspect,
When a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display at the time of the number of pending memories N, and when the number of pending memories N While a time variable display is being executed, if the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored, and during the execution of the suspended storage number N time variable display, the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, and the next variable display is started. When a new suspended memory is stored during the period immediately before the suspended memory number N time variable display ends and a new suspended memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts. and a case where a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period while the variable display of pending memory number 0 is being executed. , during the execution of the pending memory number 0 hour variable display, when the period until the pending memory number 0 hour variable display ends is shorter than a predetermined period, the pending memory number 0 hour variable display ends. When a new pending memory is stored at a time other than immediately before, and when the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period while the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours is being executed. In this case, a new pending memory is stored immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends, and a new pending memory is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends. In either case, the entered award performance can be executed;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing the new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of pending memories. In addition, if the number of pending memories has reached the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the pending memory will not be stored until the next variable display starts, so new pending memories will be added in stages. Changes are not executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the newly stored pending memory during the specific period in which the pending display position moves from the start of the variable display to the pending display. Since the display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, there is no need to change the stepwise change to the completion mode, and the stepwise change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if a hold display that has already been displayed at a predetermined number is moved and a hold display that is newly displayed at a predetermined number overlaps, the display area used by the newly displayed hold display is wider. Therefore, the newly displayed pending display can be easily recognized and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, since the prize-winning performance can be executed regardless of whether or not there is a change in the completion mode of the stepwise change, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 72, Fig. 73, Fig. 75, Fig. 76, Fig. 81 to Fig. 84, Fig. 92

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When the suspension memory is stored, one suspension display is displayed among a plurality of types of suspension displays including a normal suspension display and a special suspension display that has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal suspension display. It is possible and
When the pending memory is stored, a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the normal pending display,
When the pending memory is stored, a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode that is one mode before the special completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the special hold display,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is The special hold is performed by starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. The normal hold display starts in the normal start mode, changes from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and then When the variable display starts, the normal pending display is displayed by changing to the normal completion mode based on the timing,
When a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. In a situation where the special hold display is started in the special start mode, changed from the special start mode to a special mid-way mode different from the special before-completion mode, and is in a special half-way mode different from the special before-completion mode, When the variable display starts, the special completion mode is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special pending display is displayed;
If the number of pending memories N time variable display ends and a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing and the normal pending display is displayed, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of pending memories is displayed. starting the normal pending display at the position in the normal start mode, changing stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. display the corresponding normal hold display,
When the N-time variable display of the number of pending memories ends and a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of pending memories is displayed. starting the special hold display at the position in the special start mode, changing the special start mode stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period; to display the special hold indication;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change the game, and the player can see the gradual change. Furthermore, even if a special pending display is displayed, the rules for changing the staged display to the normal completion mode or special completion mode and whether or not to execute such changes are the same as when the normal pending display is displayed. is applied, it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 72 to Figure 74
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "normal hold display" corresponds to the "white hold display due to the decision not to execute the hold change effect" in this embodiment,
The "special hold display" corresponds to the "blue and red hold display due to the decision to execute the hold change effect" in this embodiment,
The "normal start mode" corresponds to the "white pending display that is displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" in this embodiment,
The "normal completion mode" corresponds to the "pending display that is displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" in this embodiment. death,
The "normal mid-way mode" corresponds to the "holding display that is displayed as an image from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the holding change effect" in this embodiment,
The "special start mode" corresponds to the "blue or red pending display that is displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation due to the decision to execute the pending change effect" in this embodiment,
"Special completion mode" in this embodiment is "a blue or red pending display that is displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation when execution of the pending change effect is decided. ” corresponds to
The "special midway mode" corresponds to the "blue or red pending display that is displayed as an image from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" in this embodiment. .

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When the suspension memory is stored, one suspension display is displayed among a plurality of types of suspension displays including a normal suspension display and a special suspension display that has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal suspension display. It is possible and
When the pending memory is stored, a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the normal pending display,
When the pending memory is stored, a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode that is one mode before the special completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the special hold display,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is The special hold is performed by starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is When displaying, start the normal hold display in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, change from the normal start mode to the normal middle mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display starts in a situation where the normal intermediate mode is different from the normal pre-completion mode, the normal pending display is displayed with the normal completion mode changed based on the timing. ,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is When displaying, start the special hold display in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, change from the special start mode to a special mid-way mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display starts in a situation where the special midway mode is different from the special pre-completion mode, the special pending display is displayed by changing to the special completion mode based on the timing. ,
When the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is stored. When displaying, start the normal hold display in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and set the timing at which the next variable display starts in the normal start mode. By changing the mode to the normal completion mode based on the timing and displaying the normal pending display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is stored. When displaying, start the special hold display in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and set the timing at which the next variable display starts in the special start mode. By changing to the special completion mode based on the timing and displaying the special pending display,
Immediately after the N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
If a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed immediately after the N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the special pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. Starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, to display the special hold. show display,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, with the hold memory stored at the same timing as the start of the variable display, the hold display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to the completion mode, and the player can show gradual changes. Furthermore, even if a special pending display is displayed, the rules for changing the staged display to the normal completion mode or special completion mode and whether or not to execute such changes are the same as when the normal pending display is displayed. is applied, it is easier for the player to recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When the suspension memory is stored, one suspension display is displayed among a plurality of types of suspension displays including a normal suspension display and a special suspension display that has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal suspension display. It is possible and
When the pending memory is stored, a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the normal pending display,
When the pending memory is stored, a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode that is one mode before the special completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the special hold display,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is The special hold is performed by starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. The normal hold display starts in the normal start mode, changes from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and then When the variable display starts, the normal pending display is displayed by changing to the normal completion mode based on the timing,
When a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. In a situation where the special hold display is started in the special start mode, changed from the special start mode to a special mid-way mode different from the special before-completion mode, and is in a special half-way mode different from the special before-completion mode, When the variable display starts, the special completion mode is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special pending display is displayed;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
When a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. starting the normal pending display at the position in the normal start mode, changing the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes in stages, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. display the corresponding normal hold display,
When a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. Starting the special hold display at the position in the special start mode, changing the special start mode stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. display the special hold display,
When a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. The normal pending display is started in the normal start mode at the position, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and is a normal middle mode different from the normal pre-completion mode. When the next variable display starts depending on the situation, the normal pending display is displayed by changing to the normal completion mode based on the timing,
When a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. The special pending display is started in the special start mode at the position, and is changed from the special start mode to a special mid-way mode different from the special before-completion mode, and is a special mid-way mode different from the special before-completion mode. When the next variable display starts due to the situation, the special completion mode is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special pending display is displayed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change will not be completed. It is possible to show the player a gradual change without the need to change the number, and when the hold display that has already been displayed at the Nth position is moved, the hold display that is newly displayed at the Nth position is superimposed. However, since the display area used for the newly displayed hold display is wider, the newly displayed hold display is easier to visually recognize, and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, even if a special pending display is displayed, the rules for changing the staged display to the normal completion mode or special completion mode and whether or not to execute the change are the same as when the normal pending display is displayed. is applied, it is easier for the player to recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When the suspension memory is stored, one suspension display is displayed among a plurality of types of suspension displays including a normal suspension display and a special suspension display that has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal suspension display. It is possible and
When the pending memory is stored, a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the normal pending display,
When the pending memory is stored, a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode that is one mode before the special completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the special hold display,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is The special hold is performed by starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is When displaying, start the normal hold display in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, change from the normal start mode to the normal middle mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display starts in a situation where the normal intermediate mode is different from the normal pre-completion mode, the normal pending display is displayed with the normal completion mode changed based on the timing. ,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is When displaying, start the special hold display in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, change from the special start mode to a special mid-way mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display starts in a situation where the special midway mode is different from the special pre-completion mode, the special pending display is displayed by changing to the special completion mode based on the timing. ,
When the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is stored. When displaying, start the normal hold display in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and set the timing at which the next variable display starts in the normal start mode. By changing the mode to the normal completion mode based on the timing and displaying the normal pending display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is stored. When displaying, start the special hold display in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and set the timing at which the next variable display starts in the special start mode. By changing to the special completion mode based on the timing and displaying the special pending display,
Immediately after the N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
If a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed immediately after the N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the special pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. Starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, to display the special hold. show the display,
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
When a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. starting the normal pending display at the position in the normal start mode, changing the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes in stages, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. display the corresponding normal hold display,
When a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. Starting the special hold display at the position in the special start mode, changing the special start mode stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the special hold display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours is not immediately before the end of the variable display, a new pending memory is stored. When displaying a normal hold display, start the normal hold display at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display in the normal start mode, and from the normal start mode to the normal intermediate mode different from the normal pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is started in a situation where the normal completion mode is different from the normal pre-completion mode, the normal completion mode is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing, and the normal completion mode is changed to the normal completion mode. show the display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours is not immediately before the end of the variable display, a new pending memory is stored. When displaying a special hold display, start the special hold display at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display in the special start mode, and from the special start mode to the special intermediate mode that is different from the special pre-completion mode. By changing the timing to start the next variable display in a situation where the special intermediate mode is different from the special pre-completion mode, the special completion mode is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing, and the special pending mode is changed to the special completion mode. show the display,
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends. When displaying the normal hold display, start the normal hold display in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and start the next variable display in the normal start mode. When the timing is reached, the normal pending display is displayed by changing to the normal completion mode based on the timing,
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends. When displaying the special hold display, start the special hold display in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and start the next variable display in the special start mode. When the timing is reached, the special completion mode is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is to be displayed immediately after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is completed, a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is stored. displaying the normal pending display from the normal completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is to be displayed immediately after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is completed, a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is displayed. displaying the special pending display from the special completion mode;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if the number of pending memories has reached the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the pending memory will not be stored until the next variable display starts, so new pending memories will be added in stages. Changes are not executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the newly stored pending memory during the specific period in which the pending display position moves from the start of the variable display to the pending display. Since the display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, there is no need to change the stepwise change to the completion mode, and the stepwise change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if a hold display that has already been displayed at a predetermined number is moved and a hold display that is newly displayed at a predetermined number overlaps, the display area used by the newly displayed hold display is wider. Therefore, the newly displayed pending display can be easily recognized and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, even if a special pending display is displayed, the rules for changing the staged display to the normal completion mode or special completion mode and whether or not to execute the change are the same as when the normal pending display is displayed. is applied, it is easier for the player to recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 69, Fig. 72, Fig. 73, Fig. 75, Fig. 76, Fig. 81 to Fig. 84

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform performances corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
It is possible to display a plurality of types of suspension display including a first mode suspension display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode suspension display corresponding to the second mode when the suspension memory is stored,
When the suspended memory is stored during the first mode, a first mode start mode, a first mode completion mode, and a first mode pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the first mode completion mode are stored. The first mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of first mode intermediate modes including:
When the pending memory is stored during the second mode, a second mode start mode, a second mode completion mode, and a second mode pre-completion mode, which is a mode immediately before the second mode completion mode, are stored. The second mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of second mode intermediate modes including:
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode middle modes, the second mode hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+ The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the first number, and the first mode start mode changes to a first mode midway mode that is different from the first mode completion mode. and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the first mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the first mode, so that the mode changes to the mode completed in the first mode based on the timing. to display the first mode pending display,
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+ The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the first number, and the second mode start mode changes to a second mode midway mode that is different from the second mode pre-completion mode. and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the second mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the second mode, so that the mode changes to the mode completed in the second mode based on the timing. to display the second mode pending display,
The device is in the first mode, the variable display for the number N of pending memories ends, and a new pending memory is stored until the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, and the first mode pending display is displayed. In this case, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes. displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to later change the first mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
The device is in the second mode, the variable display of the number N of pending memories ends, and a new pending memory is stored until the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, and the second mode pending display is displayed. In this case, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes. later changing to the second mode completion mode over the predetermined period and displaying the second mode pending display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change will not be completed. There is no need to change the game, and it is possible to show the player a gradual change. Further, even if the performance mode is different, the same rules regarding changes to the completion mode of the staged display are applied, so it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72 to 74, Figure 92
In addition, in this embodiment,
The “first mode” corresponds to the “production mode A” in this embodiment,
"Second mode" corresponds to "production mode B" in this embodiment,
"First mode pending display" corresponds to "cube pending display in production mode A" in this embodiment,
"Second mode pending display" corresponds to "octahedron pending display in production mode B" in this embodiment,
The "first mode start mode" corresponds to the "holding display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in production mode A" in this embodiment,
The "first mode completion mode" corresponds to the "suspension display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation in production mode A" in this embodiment,
The "intermediate mode of the second mode" corresponds to the "suspended display displayed as images from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation in production mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode start mode" corresponds to the "holding display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in production mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode completion mode" corresponds to the "suspension display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation in production mode B" in this embodiment,
The "intermediate mode of the second mode" corresponds to the "suspended display displayed as images from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation in the production mode B" in this embodiment.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform performances corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
It is possible to display a plurality of types of suspension display including a first mode suspension display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode suspension display corresponding to the second mode when the suspension memory is stored,
When the suspended memory is stored during the first mode, a first mode start mode, a first mode completion mode, and a first mode pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the first mode completion mode are stored. The first mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of first mode intermediate modes including:
When the pending memory is stored during the second mode, a second mode start mode, a second mode completion mode, and a second mode pre-completion mode, which is a mode immediately before the second mode completion mode, are stored. The second mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of second mode intermediate modes including:
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode middle modes, the second mode hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored and the first mode hold display is to be displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode. The timing at which the next variable display is started in a situation where the first mode is changed to a mode in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the first mode, and the mode is in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the first mode. displaying the first mode pending display by changing the mode to the first mode completion mode based on the timing;
When the second mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored and the second mode hold display is to be displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the second mode hold display is started from the second mode start mode. The timing at which the next variable display is started in a situation where the second mode is changed to a mode in the middle of the second mode which is different from the mode before completion of the second mode, and the mode is in the middle of the second mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the second mode. displaying the second mode pending display by changing the mode to the second mode completion mode based on the timing;
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold is applied. When the memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode. In this situation, when the next variable display is to be started, the mode is changed to the first mode completion mode based on the timing, and the first mode pending display is displayed;
When the second mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold is applied. When the memory is memorized and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode. When the next variable display is started in the situation where , the second mode completion mode is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing, and the second mode pending display is displayed;
If the first mode is in progress and the first mode pending display is displayed by storing a new pending memory immediately after the pending storage number N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the N The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, changing the mode completion mode over the predetermined period and displaying the first mode pending display;
If the second mode is in progress and a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed immediately after the pending storage number N time variable display ends and the next variable display is started, the N The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode middle modes, the second mode hold display is changing the mode completion mode over the predetermined period and displaying the second mode pending display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing the new suspended memory. In addition, when a new hold memory is stored at the same timing as the start of a variable display, the hold display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the stepwise change to the completion mode. It is possible to show the player a gradual change. Further, even if the performance mode is different, the same rules regarding changes to the completion mode of the staged display are applied, so it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76, Figure 92

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform performances corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
It is possible to display a plurality of types of suspension display including a first mode suspension display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode suspension display corresponding to the second mode when the suspension memory is stored,
When the suspended memory is stored during the first mode, a first mode start mode, a first mode completion mode, and a first mode pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the first mode completion mode are stored. The first mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of first mode intermediate modes including:
When the pending memory is stored during the second mode, a second mode start mode, a second mode completion mode, and a second mode pre-completion mode, which is a mode immediately before the second mode completion mode, are stored. The second mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of second mode intermediate modes including:
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode middle modes, the second mode hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+ The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the first number, and the first mode start mode changes to a first mode midway mode that is different from the first mode completion mode. and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the first mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the first mode, so that the mode changes to the mode completed in the first mode based on the timing. to display the first mode pending display,
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+ The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the first number, and the second mode start mode changes to a second mode midway mode that is different from the second mode pre-completion mode. and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the second mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the second mode, so that the mode changes to the mode completed in the second mode based on the timing. to display the second mode pending display,
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
When a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed when the first mode is in effect and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is longer than the predetermined period, , the first mode pending display is started in the first mode starting mode at a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode starting mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes. displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to later change the first mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed when the second mode is in progress and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is longer than the predetermined period, , the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to later change to the second mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed when the first mode is in effect and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, , the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode start mode is changed from the first mode start mode to the first mode midway, which is different from the first mode completion mode. The first mode is completed based on the timing when the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the first mode. displaying the first mode pending display by changing the mode,
When a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed when the second mode is in progress and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, , starts the second mode hold display in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and changes from the second mode start mode to the middle of the second mode which is different from the second mode completion mode. The second mode is completed based on the timing when the next variable display is started in the situation where the second mode is in the middle mode which is different from the second mode completion mode. displaying the second mode pending display by changing the mode;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change will not be completed. It is possible to show the gradual change to the player without the need to change the status, and when the hold display that has already been displayed at the Nth position is moved, even if the hold display that is newly displayed at the Nth position is superimposed. Since the display area to be used is wider for the newly displayed hold display, the newly displayed hold display is easier to visually recognize, and misidentification can be prevented. Further, even if the performance mode is different, the same rules regarding changes to the completion mode of the staged display are applied, so it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82, Figure 92

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform performances corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
It is possible to display a plurality of types of suspension display including a first mode suspension display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode suspension display corresponding to the second mode when the suspension memory is stored,
When the suspended memory is stored during the first mode, a first mode start mode, a first mode completion mode, and a first mode pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the first mode completion mode are stored. The first mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of first mode intermediate modes including:
When the pending memory is stored during the second mode, a second mode start mode, a second mode completion mode, and a second mode pre-completion mode, which is a mode immediately before the second mode completion mode, are stored. The second mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of second mode intermediate modes including:
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode middle modes, the second mode hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored and the first mode hold display is to be displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode. The timing at which the next variable display is started in a situation where the first mode is changed to a mode in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the first mode, and the mode is in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the first mode. displaying the first mode pending display by changing the mode to the first mode completion mode based on the timing;
When the second mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored and the second mode hold display is to be displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the second mode hold display is started from the second mode start mode. The timing at which the next variable display is started in a situation where the second mode is changed to a mode in the middle of the second mode which is different from the mode before completion of the second mode, and the mode is in the middle of the second mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the second mode. displaying the second mode pending display by changing the mode to the second mode completion mode based on the timing;
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold is applied. When the memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode. In this situation, when the next variable display is to be started, the mode is changed to the first mode completion mode based on the timing, and the first mode pending display is displayed;
When the second mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold is applied. When the memory is memorized and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode. When the next variable display is started in the situation where , the second mode completion mode is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing, and the second mode pending display is displayed;
If the first mode is in progress and the first mode pending display is displayed by storing a new pending memory immediately after the pending storage number N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the N The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, changing the mode completion mode over the predetermined period and displaying the first mode pending display;
If the second mode is in progress and a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed immediately after the pending memory number N time variable display ends and the next variable display is started, the N The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode middle modes, the second mode hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
When a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed when the first mode is in effect and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is longer than the predetermined period, , the first mode pending display is started in the first mode starting mode at a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode starting mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes. displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to later change the first mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed when the second mode is in progress and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is longer than the predetermined period, , the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to later change to the second mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
In the first mode, when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours is not immediately before the end, When a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is to be displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode hold display is The mode is changed from the mode start mode to the first mode halfway mode which is different from the mode before completion of the first mode, and the next variable display starts in the situation where the mode is in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before completion of the first mode. When the timing is reached, the mode is changed to the first mode completion mode based on the timing and the first mode pending display is displayed;
When the second mode is in effect, the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and the time period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours is not immediately before the end, When a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is to be displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode. The mode is changed from the mode start mode to the second mode middle mode which is different from the second mode before completion mode, and the next variable display starts in the situation where the second mode middle mode is different from the second mode before completion mode. When the timing is reached, the mode is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing and the second mode pending display is displayed;
When the first mode is in effect, the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and the time period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends immediately before the end; , when a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is to be displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode. When the next variable display is started in the situation where the first mode start mode is set, the first mode pending display is displayed by changing to the first mode completion mode based on the timing,
when the second mode is in effect, the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends; , when a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is to be displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode. When the next variable display starts in the situation where the mode is in the second mode start mode, the second mode is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing and the second mode pending display is displayed;
If the first mode is in progress and a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends, the next one after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is stored. displaying the first mode pending display from the first mode completion mode at a pending display position corresponding to the variable display of;
If the second mode is in progress and a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends, the next one after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is stored. displaying the second mode pending display from the second mode completion mode at a pending display position corresponding to the variable display of;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if the number of pending memories has reached the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the pending memory will not be stored until the next variable display starts, so new pending memories will be added in stages. Changes are not executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the newly stored pending memory during the specific period in which the pending display position moves from the start of the variable display to the pending display. Since the display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, there is no need to change the stepwise change to the completion mode, and the stepwise change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if a hold display that has already been displayed at a predetermined number is moved and a hold display that is newly displayed at a predetermined number overlaps, the display area used by the newly displayed hold display is wider. Therefore, the newly displayed pending display can be easily recognized and misidentification can be prevented. Further, even if the performance mode is different, the same rules regarding changes to the completion mode of the staged display are applied, so it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 72, Fig. 73, Fig. 75, Fig. 76, Fig. 81 to Fig. 84, Fig. 92

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, When the storage of information regarding the variable display of the stored specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area. The manner in which it corresponds to the fact that
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is not adapted to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, but the variable display of specific identification information is displayed in the pending storage area. maintain the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the information is not stored;
The performance control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If the variable display for the number N of pending storage is ended and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display corresponding to the N-th number is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, especially in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no pending storage, in the processing of the game control means, the storage area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area. After storing the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area by a shifting process, but at this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is suspended. By changing the mode in which the number of stored memories is 1 to the mode in which the number of pending memories is shown as 0, the number of pending memories is changed to a mode in which the number of pending memories only shows 1, which makes the display mode rather cumbersome and gives the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 39, Figure 72 to Figure 74
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "effect control means" corresponds to the "presentation control CPU 120" in this embodiment,
"Storage means" corresponds to "RAM 102, especially game control data holding area 001SG150" in this embodiment,
"Specific identification information" corresponds to "eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B" in this embodiment,
The "game control means side light emitting means" in this embodiment corresponds to the "LEDs forming the special drawing unit 201, especially the LEDs forming the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B",
The "production control means side light emitting means" corresponds to the "LEDs forming the first sub-hold display 151A and the second sub-hold display 151B" in this embodiment,
“The variable display storage area” corresponds to “the entry (storage area) of the reservation number “0” in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A or the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B” in this embodiment,
The "first pending storage area" corresponds to the "entries (storage area) of pending numbers "1 to 4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment,
The "starting area" corresponds to the "first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A) and second starting winning opening (variable winning ball device 6B)" in this embodiment.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, When the storage of information regarding the variable display of the stored specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area. The manner in which it corresponds to the fact that
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is not adapted to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, but the variable display of specific identification information is displayed in the pending storage area. maintain the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the information is not stored;
The performance control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, especially in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no pending storage, in the processing of the game control means, the storage area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area. After storing the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area by a shifting process, but at this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is suspended. By changing the mode in which the number of stored memories is 1 to the mode in which the number of pending memories is shown as 0, the number of pending memories is changed to a mode in which the number of pending memories only shows 1, which makes the display mode rather cumbersome and gives the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 39, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, When the storage of information regarding the variable display of the stored specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area. The manner in which it corresponds to the fact that
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is not adapted to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, but the variable display of specific identification information is displayed in the pending storage area. maintain the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the information is not stored;
The performance control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
When a variable display of pending memory number 0 is being executed, which is a variable display of specific identification information in a situation where information regarding specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. In a situation where the hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the start mode, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display while changing the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, especially in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no pending storage, in the processing of the game control means, the storage area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area. After storing the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area by a shifting process, but at this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is suspended. By changing the mode in which the number of stored memories is 1 to the mode in which the number of pending memories is shown as 0, the number of pending memories is changed to a mode in which the number of pending memories only shows 1, which makes the display mode rather cumbersome and gives the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 39, Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, When the storage of information regarding the variable display of the stored specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area. The manner in which it corresponds to the fact that
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is not adapted to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, but the variable display of specific identification information is displayed in the pending storage area. maintain the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the information is not stored;
The performance control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the pending storage number 0 variable display is being executed, which is the variable display of the specific identification information in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is not immediately before the end, new specific identification information is When the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and from the start mode the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. By changing the display to the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started in a situation where the display is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. Display the pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated is shorter than the predetermined period, and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated, new specific identification information is If the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and the next specific identification is started in the start mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If information regarding a new variable display of specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended, it corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information following the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0. displaying the pending display from the completion mode at the pending display position;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, especially in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no pending storage, in the processing of the game control means, the storage area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area. After storing the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area by a shifting process, but at this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is suspended. By changing the mode in which the number of stored memories is 1 to the mode in which the number of pending memories is shown as 0, the number of pending memories is changed to a mode in which the number of pending memories only shows 1, which makes the display mode rather cumbersome and gives the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 39, Fig. 72, Fig. 73, Fig. 75, Fig. 76, Fig. 81 to Fig. 84

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a number of reserved pitches indicating the number of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium has passed through the starting area. sometimes storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, after the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, the display of the number of pending pitches is changed. The aspect corresponds to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area,
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If the variable display for the number N of pending storage is ended and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display corresponding to the N-th number is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved balls can be recognized using a plurality of means, and in particular, A stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72 to 74, Figure 88, Figure 89
In addition, in this embodiment,
"Display means" corresponds to "image display device 5" in this embodiment,
The "pending pitch count display" corresponds to the "pending display displayed in the pending storage display area 5U" in this embodiment.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a number of reserved pitches indicating the number of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium has passed through the starting area. sometimes storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, after the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, the display of the number of pending pitches is changed. The aspect corresponds to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area,
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved balls can be recognized using a plurality of means, and in particular, A stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76, Figure 88, Figure 89

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a number of reserved pitches indicating the number of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium has passed through the starting area. sometimes storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, after the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, the display of the number of pending pitches is changed. The aspect corresponds to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area,
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
When a variable display of pending memory number 0 is being executed, which is a variable display of specific identification information in a situation where information regarding specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. In a situation where the hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the start mode, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display while changing the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved balls can be recognized using a plurality of means, and in particular, A stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82, Figure 88, Figure 89

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a number of reserved pitches indicating the number of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium has passed through the starting area. sometimes storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, after the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, the display of the number of pending pitches is changed. The aspect corresponds to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area,
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the pending storage number 0 variable display is being executed, which is the variable display of the specific identification information in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is not immediately before the end, new specific identification information is When the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and from the start mode the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. By changing the display to the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started in a situation where the display is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. Display the pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated is shorter than the predetermined period, and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated, new specific identification information is If the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and the next specific identification is started in the start mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If information regarding a new variable display of specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended, it corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information following the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0. displaying the pending display from the completion mode at the pending display position;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved balls can be recognized using a plurality of means, and in particular, A stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 72, Fig. 73, Fig. 75, Fig. 76, Fig. 81 to Fig. 84, Fig. 88, Fig. 89

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
The performance control means is
When variable display of specific identification information is performed, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial mode and then the final mode. start displaying the specific display until the mode is reached,
When the variable display of specific identification information is not executed, when information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the start mode, the completion mode, and the mode immediately before the completion mode are stored. It is possible to display a pending display by changing in stages a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state, and
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If the variable display for the number N of pending storage is ended and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display corresponding to the N-th number is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting a specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to notify by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. By starting to display the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the time when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the variable display of the specific identification information can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling as though only the display is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 72 to 74, Figure 85
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "game control means side light emitting means" in this embodiment is the "LED that constitutes the special symbol unit 201, especially the LED that constitutes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B"
The "initial state" corresponds to the "state in which the first LED among the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is lit" in this embodiment,
The "final mode" corresponds to "the mode in which the 8th LED among the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is lit" in this embodiment,
"Specific display" corresponds to "active display" in this embodiment.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
When variable display of specific identification information is performed, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial mode and then the final mode. start displaying the specific display until the mode is reached,
When the variable display of specific identification information is not executed, when information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the start mode, the completion mode, and the mode immediately before the completion mode are stored. It is possible to display a pending display by changing in stages a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state, and
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting a specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to notify by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. By starting to display the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the time when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the variable display of the specific identification information can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling as though only the display is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 75, Figure 76, Figure 85

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
When variable display of specific identification information is performed, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial mode and then the final mode. start displaying the specific display until the mode is reached,
When the variable display of specific identification information is not executed, when information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the start mode, the completion mode, and the mode immediately before the completion mode are stored. It is possible to display a pending display by changing in stages a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state, and
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
When a variable display of pending memory number 0 is being executed, which is a variable display of specific identification information in a situation where information regarding specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. In a situation where the hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the start mode, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display while changing the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting a specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to notify by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. By starting to display the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the time when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the variable display of the specific identification information can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling as though only the display is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 73, Figure 81, Figure 82, Figure 85

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
The performance control means is
When variable display of specific identification information is performed, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial mode and then the final mode. start displaying the specific display until the mode is reached,
When the variable display of specific identification information is not executed, when information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the start mode, the completion mode, and the mode immediately before the completion mode are stored. It is possible to display a pending display by changing in stages a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state, and
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the pending storage number 0 variable display is being executed, which is the variable display of the specific identification information in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is not immediately before the end, new specific identification information is When the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and from the start mode the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. By changing the display to the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started in a situation where the display is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. Display the pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated is shorter than the predetermined period, and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated, new specific identification information is If the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and the next specific identification is started in the start mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If information regarding a new variable display of specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended, it corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information following the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0. displaying the pending display from the completion mode at the pending display position;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing the new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of pending memories. In addition, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting a specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to notify by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. By starting to display the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the time when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the variable display of the specific identification information can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the display is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 72, Fig. 73, Fig. 75, Fig. 76, Fig. 81 to Fig. 85

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the execution of variable display of specific identification information,
The effect control means is capable of changing the mode of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the execution of variable display of specific identification information,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the performance control means side light emitting means executes the variable display of the specific identification information. Before changing to the mode corresponding to the above, the game control means side light emitting means changes to the mode corresponding to the fact that the specific identification information is being variably displayed;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the performance control means side light emitting means visible, variable display of specific identification information is executed using a plurality of means. In particular, a stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming value.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 85
In addition, in this embodiment,
"A plurality of reserved storage areas including the first reserved storage area" corresponds to "the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, When the storage of information regarding the variable display of the stored specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area. The manner in which it corresponds to the fact that
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is not adapted to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, but the variable display of specific identification information is displayed in the pending storage area. maintaining the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information about the information is not stored;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, especially in a situation where variable display is not executed and there is no pending storage, the first pending storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the processing of the game control means. After storing information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the starting area in the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area in a shifting process, but at that time, the light emitting means on the game control means side is moved to the variable display storage area. By changing the mode from a mode in which the number of pending memories shows 1 to a mode in which the number of pending memories shows 0, the number of pending memories will show only 1 for a moment, which makes the display mode more cumbersome and distracts the player. It is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort from occurring, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 39

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the production control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, Based on moving the storage of the stored information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information to the variable display storage area, the aspect of the light emitting means on the production control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is transferred to the reserved storage area. A mode corresponding to the fact that it is not remembered,
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the production control means is not set in a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and the specific identification information is variably displayed in the pending storage area. maintaining the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information about the information is not stored;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, especially in a situation where variable display is not executed and there is no pending storage, the first pending storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the processing of the game control means. After storing information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the starting area in the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area in the shifting process, but at that time, the light emitting means on the production control means side is moved. By changing the mode from a mode in which the number of pending memories shows 1 to a mode in which the number of pending memories shows 0, the number of pending memories will show only 1 for a moment, which makes the display mode more cumbersome and distracts the player. It is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort from occurring, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 83, Figure 85

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
comprising a storage means;
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The performance control means is
It is possible to cause the display means to display a number of pending pitches indicating the number of information related to variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
If the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the suspension storage area, the suspended pitch count display corresponds to the fact that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the suspension storage area. It is possible to display
If the first reserved storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the above aspect of the aspect corresponds to the fact that the first reserved storage area stores the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information. It is possible to display the number of pending pitches,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display ends, if the first reserved storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. displaying the number of reserved pitches in a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then storing the information in the first reserved storage area. The suspension according to the aspect corresponding to the fact that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the suspension storage area based on moving the storage of the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information to the variable display storage area. Executes control to display pitch count display,
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not displayed in the mode corresponding to the storage of information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the first reservation storage area, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the suspension storage area. maintaining the display of the number of pending pitches in a manner corresponding to the fact that the number of pending pitches is not stored;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, especially in a situation where variable display is not executed and there is no pending storage, the first pending storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the processing of the game control means. After storing information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area in the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area by a shifting process, but at this time, the display means displays the number of reserved pitches. By changing the display from where the number of pending balls is 1 to a display where the number of pending balls is 0, the number of pending balls will be displayed as 1 for a moment. It is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable, and as a result, it is possible to provide a stable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 100

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information when the gaming medium passes through the starting area,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area when
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The effect control means is configured to start the effect when the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information. When the game medium passes through the area, after the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, The mode of the light emitting means on the side of the production control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the performance control means side light emitting means visible, the number of pending memories can be recognized using a plurality of means. In particular, a stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 81, Figure 82

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a number of reserved pitches indicating the number of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, the game control means changes the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side to display the specific identification information in the first reservation storage area. It is possible to set the mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display is stored,
When information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, the effect control means changes the mode of the display of the number of reserved pitches to the variable display of the specific identification information in the first reservation storage area. It is possible to display the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that the information is stored,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium has passed through the starting area. sometimes storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The effect control means is configured to start the effect when the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information. When the game medium passes through the area, after the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, The mode of displaying the number of reserved pitches is a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, it is possible to recognize the number of reserved balls using a plurality of means. In particular, a stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 88, Figure 89

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The effect control means is capable of causing the display means to display a specific display when information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The effect control means changes the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means to the initial mode when the game medium passes through the starting area in a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means. and starting displaying the specific display between when and when the final mode is reached.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by performing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting a specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to know that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. Recognition can be performed by multiple means, among which, by starting to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display from the time when the variable display of specific identification information becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the identification It is possible to prevent the user from feeling as if only the variable display of identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 85

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The effect control means is capable of causing the display means to display a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The effect control means changes the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means to the initial mode when the game medium passes through the starting area in a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means. and starting variable display of the decoration identification information between when and when the final mode is reached.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by performing variable display of the specific identification information and then performing variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to indicate multiple times that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. Among them, by starting the variable display of the decorative identification information from the time when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the initial mode until the final mode, the variable display of the specific identification information can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling as though only the display is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 86, Figure 87

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a production control means side light emission means controlled by the production control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The performance control means is
When the variable display of the specific identification information is executed, the mode of the production control means side light emitting means can be switched from an initial mode to a final mode, and the switching can be executed multiple times,
It is possible to cause the display means to display a specific display when information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The effect control means changes the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the effect to the initial mode when the game medium passes through the starting area in a situation where the storage means does not store information regarding variable display of specific identification information. and starting displaying the specific display between when and when the final mode is reached.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means on the production control means side and then displaying a specific display, it is possible to indicate multiple times that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. Among them, by starting to display a specific display from the time when the display mode of the light emitting means on the production control means side becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the display mode on the production control means side can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling as if only the mode of the light emitting means is being changed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a production control means side light emission means controlled by the production control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The performance control means is
When the variable display of the specific identification information is executed, the mode of the production control means side light emitting means can be switched from an initial mode to a final mode, and the switching can be executed multiple times,
It is possible to cause the display means to display a variable display of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The effect control means changes the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the effect to the initial mode when the game medium passes through the starting area in a situation where the storage means does not store information regarding variable display of specific identification information. and starting variable display of the decoration identification information between the time when the final mode is reached and the final mode is reached.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the production control means and then performing variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display is started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. This can be recognized by a plurality of means, among which the variable display of the decoration identification information can be started from when the display mode of the light emitting means on the side of the production control means becomes the initial mode until it becomes the final mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as though only the mode of the light emitting means on the production control means side is being executed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 86, Figure 87

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
By switching the image corresponding to the specific display a special number of times according to the switching cycle when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area. moving an image corresponding to the specific display from a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is ended, the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed the special number of times according to the switching cycle. terminating the display of the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display storage area by switching a specific number of times smaller than
It is characterized by
According to this feature, variable display By impressing a moving image that moves an image corresponding to a specific display executed in response to the start of the game, it is possible to give an impression that the game medium passes through the start area, and as a result, a suitable game environment is provided. I can do it.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 52, Figures 81 to 84
In addition, in this embodiment,
The “switching cycle” corresponds to the “image update cycle of 33 ms” in this embodiment,
"Special number of times" corresponds to "10 times (shift animation compatible number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of shift animation (10 frames)" in this embodiment,
The "specific number of times" corresponds to "5 times (number of times corresponding to the end animation) corresponding to the number of frames (5 frames) of the end animation" in this embodiment.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, and information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area, the starting area is When passing, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times according to the switching cycle, and the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area;
When the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is ended, the information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display area. switching the image corresponding to the specific display a specific number of times less than the predetermined number of times according to the switching cycle, and terminating the display of the image corresponding to the specific display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, game media By impressing an animation by switching a predetermined number of times of the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area, which is executed in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium, It is possible to give an impression of the passing of the game, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 52, Figure 72, Figure 73
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "predetermined number of times" corresponds to "20 times (number of times corresponding to the appearance animation) corresponding to the number of frames (20 frames) of the appearance animation" in this embodiment.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, and information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, the game medium passes through the starting area. when the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times according to the switching cycle to display the image corresponding to the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area, and stored in the first reserved storage area. When the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being displayed is moved to the corresponding variable display area, the first suspension is performed by switching the image corresponding to the specific display a specific number of times that is less than a predetermined number of times according to the switching cycle. moving and displaying an image corresponding to the specific display from a display position corresponding to the storage area to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first holding storage area is executed in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium, rather than the moving image for moving the image corresponding to the specific display, which is executed in response to the start of the variable display. By creating an impression of a moving image by switching the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the specific display a predetermined number of times, it is possible to impress the passing of the starting area by the gaming medium, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment is provided. can do.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 52

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
When the first holding storage area stores information regarding variable display of specific identification information, the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first holding storage area in accordance with the switching cycle. (N≧30) switching and displaying the number of times as one cycle,
When the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the corresponding variable display area, the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed a number of times less than N times according to the switching cycle. moving and displaying an image corresponding to the specific display from a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area by switching;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a moving image in which one cycle is equal to N times of images corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending storage area has many opportunities to be viewed by the player, the switching cycle is By increasing the number of switching according to the above, it is possible to create a smooth moving image, and the moving image that moves the image corresponding to the specific display that is executed in response to the start of the variable display has an opportunity for the player to view it visually. Therefore, by reducing the number of times of switching according to the switching period, it is possible to convey the feeling of movement while giving a sense of speed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 52 and modified examples

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
When the first reserved storage area stores information regarding variable display of specific identification information, the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area according to the switching cycle N (N≧30) switching and displaying the number of times as one cycle,
An image corresponding to the specific display when the game medium passes through the starting area when the variable display of the specific identification information is not executed and the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information. displaying an image corresponding to the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area by switching the image a number of times less than N times according to the switching period;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a moving image whose period is equal to N times of images corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first holding storage area has many opportunities to be visually recognized by technicians, the switching period is A smooth moving image can be obtained by increasing the number of times of switching according to the above, and a specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first holding storage area, which is executed in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. Since there are few opportunities for players to view moving images by switching images corresponding to the above, by reducing the number of times of switching according to the switching cycle, a specific display can be newly displayed while creating a sense of speed. As a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 52 and modified examples

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
When the first holding storage area stores information regarding variable display of specific identification information, the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first holding storage area in accordance with the switching cycle. (N≧30) switching and displaying the number of times as one cycle,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is terminated, the image corresponding to the specific identification displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display storage area is changed by switching the image corresponding to the specific display a number of times less than N times according to the switching cycle. Terminate the display of the image corresponding to the display,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a moving image in which one cycle is equal to N times of images corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending storage area has many opportunities to be viewed by the player, the switching cycle is By increasing the number of switching according to the above, it is possible to create a smooth video image, and it corresponds to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display area that is executed in response to the end of the variable display. Since there are few opportunities for players to visually check moving images caused by image switching, by reducing the number of changes according to the switching cycle, it is possible to create a sense of speed while also conveying that the game has ended. A suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 52 and modified examples

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
comprising a storage means;
The effect control means is capable of controlling the display means to display a specific display when information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area when
The performance control means is
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area after a predetermined period of time after the game medium passes through the starting area. By displaying the display in a manner with low transmittance and moving the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reservation storage area to the variable display storage area, the first reservation storage area moving said specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to said variable display storage area to a display position corresponding to said variable display storage area;
If information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, after the predetermined period has elapsed after the game medium passes through the start area, the game medium is moved to a display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area. Starting the display of the specific display in a mode with high transmittance, and then displaying the specific display by executing an appearance animation that changes from a mode with high transmittance to a mode with low transmittance.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, the display mode of the specific display has a low transmittance and is easy to recognize in order to quickly notify that the game medium has passed through the starting area. Therefore, in situations where there is no retained memory but a variable display is executed, we also pay attention to the variable display, so that it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that a specific display has been displayed due to sudden display. Therefore, by gradually displaying the game media, it is possible to convey the passage of the game medium through the starting area using the appearance animation, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable game environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 58, Figure 59, Figure 65

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
It is possible to display a demonstration display,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
It is possible to display the demonstration display when the storage means does not store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
If a game medium passes through the starting area while displaying the demonstration display, the display of the demonstration display is ended, and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area. , starting a movement animation for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area from the next switching cycle after displaying the specific display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the demonstration display is released, the specific display is once displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area, and then moved to the display position corresponding to the variable display storage area. Therefore, it is possible to easily convey that the game medium has passed through the starting area during the demonstration display, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable game environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 86, Figure 87
In addition, in this embodiment,
"Demonstration display" corresponds to "demonstration display effect" in this embodiment.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
It is possible to display a guide display regarding production settings,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
It is possible to display the guide display when the storage means does not store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
If a game medium passes through the starting area while the guidance display is being displayed, the display of the guidance display is ended and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area. , starting a movement animation for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area from the next switching cycle after displaying the specific display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the guidance display is released, the specific display is once displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area, and then moved to the display position corresponding to the variable display storage area. Therefore, during the guidance display, it is possible to easily convey that the game medium has passed through the starting area, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 90, Figure 91
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "guidance display" corresponds to the "menu guide display" in this embodiment.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information after the variable display storage area and the variable display storage area. a plurality of storage areas including a first storage area, and a plurality of storage areas including a first storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the holding storage area when the game medium passes through the start area while executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and stores the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the memory. transmitting a corresponding specific command to the performance control means, and then executing a process of updating the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side;
The production control means executes a process of updating the mode of the production control means side light emitting means based on the received specific command,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game control means first sends a specific command to the performance control means, and then performs a process of updating the mode of the game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means itself. Even when the aspect of the side light emitting means is sequentially changed, it is possible to prevent the period from being too empty, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 42, Figure 72 to Figure 76
Note that in this embodiment, the "specific command" corresponds to the "pending storage number notification command" in this embodiment.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information after the variable display storage area and the variable display storage area. a plurality of storage areas including a first storage area, and a plurality of storage areas including a first storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When the game medium passes through the starting area while executing the variable display of the specific identification information, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the holding storage area, and then the specific identification information corresponding to the passage is stored. Based on the start of the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the passage, the information about the variable display of the specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, and a specific command corresponding to the movement is transmitted to the effect control means. , execute a process of updating the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side,
The effect control means executes a process of updating the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the received specific command,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game control means first sends a specific command to the performance control means, and then performs processing to update the mode of the game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means itself, thereby increasing the number of pending memories. Even when the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is sequentially changed in response to a decrease in , it is possible to prevent the period from being too empty, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable game environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 42, Figure 72 to Figure 76
Note that in this embodiment, the "specific command" corresponds to the "pending storage number notification command" in this embodiment.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
main status indicator light,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information when the gaming medium passes through the starting area,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is
When executing variable display of specific identification information, updating the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side,
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the storage means stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information based on the passage. Thereafter, a variable display period setting process is performed to set a variable display period for variable display of specific identification information based on the passage, and then the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is updated, and then, the variable display period setting process is performed. Start a subtraction process that subtracts the variable display period of specific identification information set in the process,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting means on the game control means side is first set to a mode that indicates execution of the variable display, and then the variable display period is subtracted, thereby indicating to the player that the variable display is being performed. The variable display period can be subtracted, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 42, Figure 72 to Figure 76

(Correspondence between the present invention and this embodiment)
In this embodiment, the "jackpot gaming state" corresponds to the "advantageous state" of the present invention, the "CPU 103" corresponds to the "gaming control means" of the present invention, and the "performance control CPU 120" corresponds to the "advantageous state" of the present invention. "1st special symbol buffer 001SG151" and "2nd special symbol buffer 001SG151B" correspond to "retention storage means" of the present invention, and "first special symbol retention number and 2. The number of reserved special figures stored is 4" corresponds to the "predetermined number" of the present invention, and the "reserved display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "start mode" of the present invention. Accordingly, "the pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation" corresponds to the "completion mode" of the present invention, and "the 19th frame from the 2nd frame of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "completion mode" of the present invention. "Holding display displayed as an eye image" corresponds to the "midway aspect" of the present invention, "shift animation" corresponds to the "holding shift" of the present invention, and "330 ms which is the display execution period of the shift animation" corresponds to the "holding shift" of the present invention. This corresponds to the "specific period" of the present invention, and "660 ms, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "predetermined period" of the present invention.

Furthermore, "timing of less than 33 ms until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0" corresponds to "immediately before the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0" of the present invention, and "timing when the number of pending memories is 0" The timing "less than 33 ms after the end of the variable display" corresponds to "immediately after the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0" according to the present invention.

Furthermore, the "flash effect at the time of winning" corresponds to the "winning effect" of the present invention.

In addition, the "white pending display due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" corresponds to the "normal pending display" of the present invention, and the "blue and red pending display due to the decision to execute the pending change effect" corresponds to the "normal pending display" of the present invention. "Display" corresponds to the "special pending display" of the present invention, and "a white pending display that is displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" corresponds to the "special pending display" of the present invention. "Normal start mode" and "holding display that is displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation due to the decision not to execute the holding change effect" is the "holding display" of the present invention. "Normal completion mode", and "pending display that is displayed as an image from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" is included in the "normal completion mode" of the present invention. Accordingly, the "blue or red pending display that is displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation due to the decision to execute the pending change effect" corresponds to the "special start mode" of the present invention, and the "pending change effect" The blue or red pending display that is displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation when execution of the effect has been decided corresponds to the ``special completion mode'' of the present invention, The "blue or red pending display that is displayed as an image from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" corresponds to the "special midway mode" of the present invention.

Furthermore, "Production mode A" corresponds to the "first mode" of the present invention, "Production mode B" corresponds to the "second mode" of the present invention, and "Suspended display of cube in production mode A" This corresponds to the "first mode pending display" of the present invention, and the "regular octahedron pending display in production mode B" corresponds to the "second mode pending display" of the present invention, and "one of the appearance animations in production mode A" corresponds to the "second mode pending display" of the present invention. ``Hold display displayed as the image of frame 1'' corresponds to the ``first mode start mode'' of the present invention, and ``displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the 1st frame of the shift animation in production mode A. The "hold display displayed as images from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation in production mode B" corresponds to the "first mode completion mode" of the present invention, and the "hold display displayed as images from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation in production mode B" corresponds to the "1st mode completion mode" of the present invention. 2 mode midway mode'', and the ``holding display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in production mode B'' corresponds to the ``second mode start mode'' of the present invention, and the ``appearance in production mode B The "holding display that is displayed as the 20th frame image of the animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation" corresponds to the "2nd mode completion mode" of the present invention, The "holding display displayed as the 19th frame image" corresponds to the "second mode intermediate aspect" of the present invention.

In addition, the "performance control CPU 120" corresponds to the "performance control means" of the present invention, the "RAM 102, especially the game control data holding area 001SG150" corresponds to the "storage means" of the present invention, and the "first special symbol The eight LEDs that make up the display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B" correspond to the "specific identification information" of the present invention. The LEDs constituting the second sub-pending display 25B correspond to the "game control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, and the "LEDs constituting the first sub-pending display 151A and the second sub-pending display 151B" correspond to the "light emitting means on the game control means side" of the present invention. It corresponds to the "light emitting means on the production control means side", and "the entry (storage area) of the reservation number "0" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" is the "variable display memory concerned" of the present invention. "area", and "entries (storage areas) of reservation numbers "1 to 4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" correspond to the "first reservation storage area" of the present invention. , "the first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A) and the second starting winning opening (variable winning ball device 6B)" corresponds to the "starting area" of the present invention.

Further, the "image display device 5" corresponds to the "display means" of the present invention, and the "holding display displayed in the holding storage display area 5U" corresponds to the "holding pitch count display" of the present invention.

Furthermore, "the LEDs constituting the special symbol unit 201, especially the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B" correspond to the "game control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, and " The mode in which the first LED of the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is lit" corresponds to the "initial mode" of the present invention, and the "first special symbol display device 4A and the mode in which the 8th LED among the LEDs constituting the second special symbol display device 4B is lit" corresponds to the "final mode" of the present invention, and "active display" falls under the "specific display" of the present invention. Applicable.

In addition, "the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" correspond to "a plurality of reserved storage areas including the first reserved storage area" of the present invention.

In addition, "image update period of 33 ms" corresponds to the "switching period" of the present invention, and "10 times (shift animation compatible number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of shift animation (10 frames)" corresponds to the "special number of times" of the present invention. ", and "5 times (number of times corresponding to the end animation) corresponding to the number of frames of the end animation (5 frames)" corresponds to the "specific number of times" of the present invention, and "the number of frames of the appearance animation (20 frames)" corresponds to the "specific number of times" of the present invention. The corresponding 20 times (the number of times corresponding to the appearance animation)" corresponds to the "predetermined number of times" of the present invention.

In addition, "demonstration display effect" corresponds to the "demonstration display" of the present invention, "menu guide display" corresponds to the "guidance display" of the present invention, and "pending memory number notification command" corresponds to the "specific command" of the present invention. ”.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

A special figure unit 201 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As shown in FIG. 18(A), the special symbol unit 201 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a first reservation display 25A, a second reservation display 25B, and a normal symbol display. It is composed of a normal drawing holding indicator 25C, a round number indicator 26, a hit indicator light 27, a right hit indicator light 28, and a status indicator light 29.

(Special symbol display device)
The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of eight LEDs, and the second special symbol display device 4B is also composed of eight LEDs. Each of the eight LEDs is called specific identification information (special symbol). Further, a group of eight LEDs is called multiple types of specific identification information (multiple types of special symbols). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are capable of changing multiple types of special symbols when a winning occurs in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole (starting conditions are met). A device that displays a “big hit” or “miss” when a combination of special symbols (a combination of eight LED lights on and off) becomes a predetermined combination in the pachinko game machine 1. It is.

(Variable display of special designs)
The "variable display" of special symbols indicates the period until a combination of special symbols appears by turning on and off the eight LEDs according to a predetermined rule. Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". The number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

(Hold indicator)
The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B each include two LEDs. The first reservation display 25A displays the number of first special symbols reserved according to the number of LEDs lit and the lighting mode, and the second reservation display 25B displays the number of second special symbols reserved according to the number of LEDs lit and the lighting mode. Display the number of memories. For example, the first reservation display 25A and the second reservation display 25B indicate that the number of special symbols reserved is one by lighting only the first LED, and By lighting up the LED, it is shown that the number of special symbols on hold is 2, and while the first LED is blinking, by lighting the second LED, the number of special symbols on hold is 3. By flashing both the first LED and the second LED, it is shown that the number of special symbols pending is 4.

(Normal symbol display)
Further, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of four LEDs, and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

The standard game reservation indicator 25C is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the number of standard game games pending, which is the number of standard game games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit and the lighting mode. For example, the ordinary figure reservation display 25C indicates that the number of ordinary figures held is 1 by lighting only the first LED, and by lighting the first and second LEDs. It shows that the number of stored figures is 2, and by flashing the first LED and lighting the second LED, it shows that the number of stored figures is 3, and the first By flashing both the LED and the second LED, it is shown that the number of stored general drawings is 4.

(Round number indicator)
The round number display 26 is composed of five LEDs, and indicates the number of rounds in a jackpot game state, which will be described later, by a combination of turning on and off these LEDs. The hit indicator light 27, the right hit indicator light 28, and the status indicator light 29 are each one LED. The winning indicator light 27 is an LED that lights up during a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later.The right-hitting indicator light 28 is an LED that lights up during a time saving state, a probability change state, and a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later. is an LED that lights up during the time saving state and variable probability state, which will be described later.

(Image display device)
As shown in FIG. 1, an image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, a display area (suspended memory display area 5U, active A display area 5F) is provided. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, in this embodiment, a common pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the first special symbol representing a variable display where execution of the first special symbol is pending is provided. A first special symbol pending memory display area in which a pending display is displayed, and a second special symbol pending memory display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which execution of the second special symbol is pending is displayed. They may be provided separately. In addition, in this embodiment, the hold storage display area 5U is a display area that displays a hold display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state, and when the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state. In some cases, it is a display area that displays a pending display according to the second special symbol. Furthermore, active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is a normal state, and an active display according to the second special symbol when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. This is a display area that displays an active display.

(Winning ball device)
A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started. In addition, the winning ball device 6A in this embodiment is arranged so that among the game balls hit by the player, the game balls flowing down the left side area (left gaming area) of the image display device 5 can win. There is.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the game ball is placed in the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state where no entry will occur (it is also said that the second starting prize opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-described one as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A normal prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the normal winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the normal winning hole 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning hole including the normal winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning." In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 in this embodiment are configured such that among the game balls shot out by the player, the game balls flowing down the right side area (right game area) of the image display device 5 are While it is possible to win a prize, the game balls flowing down the area on the left side of the image display device 5 (left gaming area) are arranged so that it is impossible or difficult to win a prize.

(passing gate)
A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

(Out port)
In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowest part of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

(Other performance devices)
At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance, and the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." Further, these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f may be collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are configured to include LEDs (see FIG. 2). Further, various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is maintained until the earlier of the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). Continued. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed to shorten the average special figure variable display time (period for changing the special figure) than in the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot. Although details will be described later, the probability variable state of this embodiment is a game state in which the average special figure variable display time is shorter than the time saving state.

That is, in the normal state in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed mainly by the player launching a game ball toward the left side game area (left game area) of the image display device 5. The time-saving state and the probability-changing state in this embodiment are the gaming states in which the player mainly launches the game ball toward the right gaming area (right gaming area) of the image display device 5, and the second This is a gaming state in which a variable display of special symbols is executed. In addition, in the jackpot game state in this embodiment, the player mainly hits the game ball toward the right side game area (right game area) of the image display device 5, so that the game ball enters the big prize opening. This is a gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be paid out.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

In addition, in the normal state in this embodiment, the game ball can enter the first starting winning hole by the player launching the gaming ball mainly toward the left gaming area, while the gaming ball can enter the second starting winning hole. The player is in a gaming state where it is difficult or impossible to win a prize. In addition, in the time saving state and variable probability state in this embodiment, the game ball can enter the second start prize opening by the player mainly launching the game ball towards the right gaming area, while the game ball can enter the second start winning hole. 1. It is difficult to win a prize in the first winning opening, or the game state is such that it is impossible to win a prize.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a serial communication circuit 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, a gate switch 21, a first starting port switch 22A, a second starting port switch 22B, a count switch 23, a normal winning port switch 24, a magnet sensor (not shown) for detecting errors, a radio wave sensor, The input port 105a receives various signals from the proximity sensor and the frame proximity sensor through the switch circuit 110, and controls (drives) the solenoids 81, 82 and the display devices and indicator lights that make up the special figure unit 201. ), and an output port 105b through which a signal is output (transmitted) via the output circuit 111.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the normal winning port switch 24 (when the game ball passes or enters and the switch is turned on). (a detection signal indicating that the detection signal, etc.) is taken in and transmitted to the input port 105a. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

In addition, the gate switch 21 in this embodiment is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and the first starting port switch 22A is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the first starting prize port. The second starting opening switch 22B is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the second starting winning opening, and the counting switch 23 is a switch for detecting that the gaming ball has entered the big winning opening. The normal winning hole switch 24 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the normal winning hole 10.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the output circuit 111 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door.

The serial communication circuit 106 has a data format using a full-duplex method, an asynchronous method, and standard NRZ (non-return zero) encoding, and communicates with the CPU ( If it is the effect control board 12, it performs serial communication with the effect control CPU 120). The serial communication circuit 106 includes a transmitter that transmits various data (for example, payout signal (prize ball number command) and performance control command) to the microcomputer of each control board, and a transmitter that transmits various data (for example, , prize ball ACK command).

Further, on the main board 11 in this embodiment, an external RAM 107 is also provided for temporarily storing data to be processed by the game control microcomputer 100. Furthermore, although not particularly shown, the main board 11 includes a setting key switch for switching the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value setting state in which the setting value can be set, and a jackpot winning probability (described later) in the setting value setting state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a touch switch to change set values such as ball rate), a door/frame opening switch to detect opening of the gaming machine frame 3, and displaying the base value of this pachinko gaming machine, etc. A possible display monitor is also connected. Note that the setting key switch, setting changeover switch, and display monitor are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that they cannot be operated by the player.

A payout control board (not shown) is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. The payout control board includes a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to the player based on the reception of the payout signal. and a game ball detection sensor provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which game balls put out by the payout device pass, and the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor is connected to the game ball detection sensor. It is possible to stop driving the dispensing device depending on the situation.

Further, a handle sensor for detecting the amount of operation by the player and a touch ring (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the ball batting operation handle 30 are connected to the payout control board. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board controls a firing device capable of firing game balls onto the game board 2. Further, a signal indicating whether the touch ring is detected or not and a signal indicating that a game ball has been fired by the firing device are input from the payout control board to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed. Further, a vibration motor 36 is provided inside the push button 31B. The vibration motor 36 is connected to the production control board 12, and can be driven by receiving a drive signal from the production control CPU 120. That is, the push button 31B of this embodiment may vibrate due to the drive of the vibration motor 36.

Further, an effect display unit 202 is provided at the lower right position of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 18(C), the performance display unit 202 includes a first performance indicator light 152A, a second performance indicator light 152B, a first sub-hold indicator 151A, a second sub-hold indicator 151B, and a right-hand display. It is composed of a lamp 153.

The first performance indicator light 152A is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the second performance indicator light 152B is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. This is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of is being executed. Each of these consists of one LED.

The first sub-holding display 151A is a display for specifying the first special figure holding memory number, and the second sub-holding display 151B is a display for specifying the second special figure holding memory number. This is an indicator for Each of these is composed of two LEDs, and the number of stored first special symbols and the number of second reserved special symbols can be displayed depending on the number of LEDs lit and the manner in which they are lit. For example, the first sub-reservation display 151A and the second sub-reservation display 151B indicate that the number of special figure reservations stored is one by lighting only the first LED, and the first and second sub-reservation indicators By lighting up the second LED, it is shown that the number of special symbols reserved is 2, and while the first LED is blinking, by lighting the second LED, the number of special symbols reserved is 3. By flashing both the first LED and the second LED, it is shown that the number of special symbols pending is 4.

In addition, the right-handed lamp 153 is one LED that lights up during the time saving state, the probability changing state, and the jackpot game state.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers. A layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer and images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (synthesized) to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area is arranged. Each layer image drawing area has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image drawing area, the higher the display priority is set in the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image drawing area. The higher the image, the lower the display priority is set in the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 5, the VRAM area includes an active display in the active display area 5F, and a first pending display that moves from the pending storage display area 5U to the active display area 5F as a shift animation. Active display image drawing area for drawing and arranging, the first pending display according to the gaming state in the pending memory display area 5U, and the display position of the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U as a shift animation. A second hold display that moves towards the first hold display, a first hold display image drawing area for drawing and arranging, a second hold display according to the gaming state in the hold memory display area 5U, and a shift animation. A second pending display image drawing area for drawing and arranging a third pending display that moves toward the display position of the second pending display in the pending storage display area 5U, and a game in the pending storage display area 5U. For drawing and arranging the third pending display according to the state and the fourth pending display that moves toward the display position of the third pending display in the pending memory display area 5U as a shift animation. A third pending display image drawing area and a fourth pending display image drawing area for drawing and arranging a fourth pending display according to the game state in the pending storage display area 5U are arranged, respectively.

In this embodiment, in addition to each image drawn and arranged in the active display image drawing area and the first to fourth pending display image drawing areas, a background image is used to draw and arrange a background image. It is possible to generate an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 by superimposing images drawn and arranged in the drawing area and the decorative pattern image drawing area for drawing and arranging the decorative pattern image. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, in the active display image drawing area, the first pending display image drawing area to the fourth pending display image drawing area, the display priority of the image drawn in the active display image drawing area is the highest. The image drawn in the first pending display image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the active display image drawing area, and the image drawn in the second pending display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the active display image drawing area. The displayed image is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the first held display image drawing area, and the image drawn in the third held display image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the second held display image drawing area. The display priority is set lower than the image drawn in the fourth pending display image drawing area, and the display priority is set lower than the image drawn in the third pending display image drawing area. There is.

In other words, among the images related to the pending display and active display, the image displayed at the display position of the fourth pending display is the image displayed at the lowest layer, and the image displayed at the display position of the third pending display The image and the image of the fourth pending display that moves toward the display position of the third pending display are displayed in a higher layer than the image displayed at the display position of the fourth pending display (priority display The image displayed at the display position of the second hold display and the image of the third hold display moving toward the display position of the second hold display are An image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed with priority) than the image displayed at the display position of the hold display and the image of the fourth hold display that moves toward the display position of the third hold display, The image displayed at the display position of the first hold display and the image of the second hold display moving toward the display position of the first hold display are displayed at the display position of the second hold display. This is an image that is displayed (displayed with priority) in a higher layer than the image of the third pending display that moves toward the display position of the second pending display, and the display position of the active display (displayed with priority). The image displayed in the display area 5F) and the image of the first pending display moving toward the display position of the active display are the images displayed in the display position of the first pending display and the image of the first pending display This image is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the second pending display image that moves toward the display position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn and placed in each image drawing area can be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 6(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start designation that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start designation that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 6(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "missing". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. The command 9502H is used as a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control and probability variable control are performed (low probability high base state, time saving state), and a gaming state in which time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state). The third gaming state designation command corresponds to the base state and variable probability state. Note that the high probability/high base state may simply be referred to as the "variable probability state".

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "0" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first special figure pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second special figure pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The 1st special figure pending memory number notification command is based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the 1st starting winning opening and the 1st starting condition is satisfied, and the 1st starting opening winning designation command is sent. Sometimes, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second special figure pending storage number notification command is based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is met, and the second starting opening winning designation command is sent. Sometimes, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first special figure pending memory number notification command and the second special figure pending memory number notification command are executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases). It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution of the special figure game.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH determines whether or not it is a reach in the variable display that results in a win (whether or not a reach effect is executed) and which type of reach is executed (normal reach or not). This is a missed effect pattern command that indicates the determination result of whether to execute the reach effect or the super reach effect.

Instead of the first special figure pending memory number notification command and the second special figure pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 6(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You can also add commands different from . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 7, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, a random number MR3 for determining the losing performance, and a random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR4, the random numerical value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random numerical value MR6 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random numerical value MR7 for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random numerical value MR1 and random numerical value MR6 can be counted. controlled by. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR7. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 001SG154, which will be described later, to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR7. It is also possible to count numerical data indicating a part of the data.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number MR3 for determining a losing performance is a random number used to determine in advance whether or not the variable display becomes a reach in a variable display where the variable display loses, and for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100". Take. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is used to determine in advance whether the variable display is normal reach or super reach when the variable display is off, and the type of super reach to be executed. This is a random number value, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR6 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR7 for determining the initial value is a random value used to determine the initial value of the random value MR1 and the random value MR7 described above, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "65536".

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot gaming state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result determination table, 22 shows that when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to display results. As a result, the probability (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment) that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to control the special figure display result to be a "jackpot" and enter the jackpot gaming state when it is in the time saving state (low probability state). In comparison, the probability of determining the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and controlling it to a jackpot game state is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

FIG. 9(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which the variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the second special symbol) The numerical value (determination value) compared with the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or "probable variable jackpot A" depending on whether the special pattern display device 4B is playing a special pattern game). They are assigned to multiple types of jackpots, such as "Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 9(B). In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. ``Probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and ``probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a low-probable, high-base state with only time-saving control being executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Uncertain variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The probability variable control and time saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot gaming states of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition, the time saving control that is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the non-probable variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state until the 100 variable displays are finished, or until the 100 variable displays are finished. It will be terminated on the condition that. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the probability variable control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state passes through the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive home situation that occurs continuously without interruption. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot. If not, the game state is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 100 times. Therefore, the time saving state is also a gaming state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable strange jackpot A", "probable strange jackpot The allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" are different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is based on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. ing.

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 10 shows an example of the configuration of a losing performance determination table stored in the ROM 101. The losing effect determination table in this embodiment determines whether the missing effect should be non-reach or reach based on the random value MR3 for judging the missing effect when it is determined that the special figure display result is to be ``miss''. In other words, this is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the reach effect in variable display. For example, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 85, the losing effect is determined to be non-reach (do not execute the reach effect), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 86 to 100. , the losing effect is determined to be a reach effect (execution of a reach effect).

11(A) to FIG. 11(C) show examples of the structure of the variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern type determination table determines the reach (variation pattern type) to be executed when the unsuccessful performance is determined to be a reach (reach performance is executed) in the failure performance determination table.Normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach This is a table for determining which of γ. In this embodiment, the variable pattern type determination table to be selected differs depending on the gaming state.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11(A) to 11(C), when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation pattern type determination table A and the value of the random number MR4 When the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table B and the value of the random number MR4, and the game When the state is a variable probability state (high probability/high base state), the variation pattern type is determined based on the variation pattern type determination table C and the value of the random number MR4. In addition, determining the variation pattern type as normal reach means deciding to execute the reach effect of normal reach during variable display and making it a miss, and determining the variation pattern type as super reach α means determining that the variation pattern type is super reach α. Deciding to execute the reach effect of super reach α during the display and make it a miss, and determining the variation pattern type as super reach β means executing the reach effect of super reach β during the variable display. Deciding that the variation pattern type is super reach γ is to determine that the super reach γ reach effect will be performed during variable display and that the result will be a loss.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11(A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 80, the fluctuation pattern type is set to normal reach. If the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 81 to 95, the variation pattern type is determined to be super reach α, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 96 to 100, the variation pattern type is determined to be super reach α. is determined as super reach β. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11(B), when the gaming state is the time saving state (low probability high base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 80, the fluctuation pattern type is set to normal reach. If the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 81 to 100, the variation pattern type is determined to be super reach γ. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11(C), when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 100, the variation pattern type is set to normal reach. decided on.

FIGS. 12A to 12C show variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), a time saving state (low probability high base state), and a variable probability state (high probability high base state), respectively. Among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display result is "jackpot" corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and the case where it is "reach". A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the cases where . In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), as shown in FIG. (PA1-1), Variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 5750ms and non-reach is out (PA1-2), Variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 3750ms and non-reach is out (PA1-3) ), a variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 20,000 ms and the normal reach is off (PA2-1A), a special figure variable display time is 25,000 ms, and a pseudo pattern that includes a temporary stop of decorative symbols and a re-variable display during the variable display. Variation pattern (PA2-1B) in which the normal reach is off after the continuous effect is executed once, the special figure variable display time is 60000ms, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed once and then the normal reach is reached α A variation pattern that results in a deviation (PA2-2A), a variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 65000 ms and a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice, and then the super reach α is deviated via the normal reach (PA2-2B) , the special figure variable display time is 70,000 ms, and the variation pattern (PA2-3A) is that the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice and then the super reach β is off via the normal reach, and the special figure variable display time is 75,000 ms. , a variation pattern (PA2-3B) in which the pseudo continuous performance is executed three times and the super reach β is off after the normal reach, a variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 20000ms and a normal reach jackpot (PB1-1A), A variable pattern (PB1-1B) in which the special figure variable display time is 25,000 ms and a pseudo continuous effect is executed once and then a normal reach jackpot, and the special figure variable display time is 60,000 ms and the pseudo continuous effect is executed once. Variation pattern (PB1-2A) in which the super reach α jackpot is achieved via the normal reach after being executed, the special figure variable display time is 65000ms, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice and then the super reach is reached via the normal reach. A variable pattern that results in a reach α jackpot (PB1-2B), a variable pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 70,000 ms, and a super reach β jackpot via a normal reach after the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice (PB1- 3A), the special figure variable display time is 75,000 ms, and a variation pattern (PB1-3B) is provided in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times and then passes through the normal reach and becomes the super reach β jackpot.

In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state (low probability high base state), as shown in FIG. 4), Variation pattern where the special figure variable display time is 2000ms and the non-reach is off (PA1-5), Variation pattern where the special figure variable display time is 10000ms and the normal reach is off (PA2-4A), Special figure The variable display time is 10,000 ms, and the variation pattern (PA2-4B) in which the normal reach is off after the pseudo continuous effect is executed once, and the special figure variable display time is 30,000 ms, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed once. A variation pattern (PA2-5A) in which Super Reach γ is off after passing through Normal Reach, and the special figure variable display time is 35000ms, and after the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice, Super Reach γ is reached via Normal Reach. A variation pattern that results in a miss (PA2-5B), a variation pattern that results in a normal reach jackpot with a special figure variable display time of 10000ms (PB1-4A), a special figure variable display time of 15000ms, and a pseudo continuous effect once. A variation pattern (PB1-4B) that becomes a normal reach jackpot after being executed, a variation pattern that has a special figure variable display time of 30000 ms, and a pseudo continuous effect that becomes a super reach γ jackpot after being executed once. (PB1-5A), the special figure variable display time is 35000ms, and a variable pattern (PB1-5B) is provided in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice and then goes through the normal reach and becomes the super reach γ jackpot. .

Furthermore, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state), as shown in FIG. 12(C), a variation pattern (PA1- 6), Variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 500ms and the non-reach is out of reach (PA1-7), Variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 5000ms and the normal reach is out of reach (PA2-6), Special figure There is a variable display time of 5000 ms and a variation pattern (PB1-6) that results in a normal reach jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the jackpot expectation level is set high, so in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the special figure variable The longer the display time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal state, the expectation level of a jackpot in which the strange display result is a "jackpot" is set higher for super reach β than for super reach α.

In addition, in this embodiment, these fluctuation patterns are determined using, in addition to the random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random number MR3 for determining a losing performance, and the random number MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined using two or less random numbers including the random number MR5 for variation pattern determination, or the variation pattern may be determined using two or less random numbers including random number MR5 for variation pattern determination. The determination may be made using four or less random numbers including the random number MR5.

13 to 16 are explanatory diagrams of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, the gaming state, the loss effect, the type of variation pattern, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13(A) to 13(F), when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a loss, the losing effect is non-reach and the variable display is If the number of reserved memories (the number of similar kind of reserved memories) of the special symbol to be executed is less than 1, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table A for losing and the value of the random number MR5, and the winning effect is non-reach. In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols for variable display is 2, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table B for loss and the random value MR5, and the loss effect is non-reach and variable display. If the number of reserved special symbols to be executed is 3, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss and the random value MR5, and the loss effect is reach and the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach. If so, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table D for a loss and the value of the random number MR5, and if the loss effect is reach and the variation pattern type is super reach α, the fluctuation pattern for loss is determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the table E and the value of the random number MR5, and if the loss effect is reach and the fluctuation pattern type is super reach β, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table F for loss and the value of the random number MR5. to determine the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14(A) to 14(D), when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state) and the variable display result is a loss, the loss effect is non-reach and variable display is executed. If the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved memories of the same type) of the special symbol to be played is 1 or less, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table G for losing and the value of the random number MR5, and the losing effect is non-reach and If the number of reserved memories of special symbols to perform variable display is two or more, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table H for loss and the value of the random number MR5, and the loss effect is reach and the fluctuation pattern type. When is normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table I for loss and the value of random value MR5, and when the loss effect is reach and the variation pattern type is super reach γ, the fluctuation pattern for loss is determined. A fluctuation pattern is determined based on the determination table J and the value of the random number MR5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15(A) to 15(C), when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability/high base state) and the variable display result is a loss, the losing effect is non-reach and variable display is executed. If the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved memories of the same type) of the special symbol to be played is 1 or less, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table K for losing and the value of the random number MR5, and the winning effect is non-reach and If the number of reserved memories (the number of similar kinds of reserved memories) of special symbols for which variable display is to be executed is 2 or more, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table L for a loss and the value of the random number MR5, and a loss effect is performed. When is a reach and the variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table M for losing and the value of the random number MR5.

As shown in FIGS. 16(A) to 16(C), when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for jackpot and the The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the numerical value MR5, and when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern determination table B for jackpot and the value of the random number MR5 are used. When the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table C and the random value MR5. decide.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 13(A) to 13(F), when the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is rejected. If the variation pattern for out-of-reach (PA1-1) is selected and the variation pattern determination table B for out-of-reach is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the variation pattern will be changed to the out-of-reach variation. If the pattern (PA1-2) is selected and the variation pattern determination table C for out-of-reach is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the variation pattern is changed to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). 3) and select the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern for the failure of the normal reach (PA2-1A). , if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1B), and if the fluctuation pattern determination table E for loss is selected, the random number MR5 If the value is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern outside of super reach α (PA2-2A), and if the value of random number MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be super reach. If the fluctuation pattern for α is determined (PA2-2B) and the fluctuation pattern determination table F for failure is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern will be changed to the fluctuation pattern for the super reach β. The variation pattern (PA2-3A) is determined, and if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PA2-3B) in which the super reach β is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14(A) to 14(D), when the fluctuation pattern determination table G for failure is selected, if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is rejected. If the variation pattern for out-of-reach (PA1-4) is selected and the variation pattern determination table H for out-of-reach is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the variation pattern will be changed to the out-of-reach variation. If the pattern (PA1-5) is selected and the variation pattern determination table I for miss is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 920, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-4A). ), and if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 921 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern for normal reach (PA2-4B), and if the fluctuation pattern determination table J for loss is selected, If the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 1 to 950, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PA2-5A) of super reach γ, and if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 951 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined The pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-5B) in which the super reach γ is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 15(A) to 15(C), when the fluctuation pattern determination table K for failure is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is rejected. If the fluctuation pattern for out-of-reach (PA1-6) is selected and the fluctuation pattern determination table L for out-of-reach is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern will be changed to the out-of-reach variation. If the pattern (PA1-7) is selected and the variation pattern determination table M for miss is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-6). ) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(A), when jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1 -1A), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 31 to 80, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1B), and the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 81 to 170. If the value is within the range of 171 to 320, the fluctuation pattern is determined as the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2A), and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 171 to 320, the fluctuation pattern is determined as the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2A). -2B), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 321 to 600, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3A), and the value of random number MR3 is 601 to 997. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3B).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(B), when jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 90, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1 -4A), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 91 to 280, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4B), and the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 281 to 580. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach γ Jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5A), and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 581 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined as the Super Reach γ Jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5A). -5B).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(C), when jackpot variation pattern determination table C is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 997, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1 -6).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined at a ratio of 1 regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the determination ratio of a plurality of jackpot variation patterns may be made different depending on the jackpot type. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal state in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and the rate of control to the jackpot game state based on the variable display per time. This is a gaming state in which the (jackpot probability) is lower than the probability variable state, and it is also the gaming state where the average special symbol variable display time is the longest among the normal state, time saving state, and probability variable state. In addition, in the time saving state in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (jackpot probability) is variable based on the variable display per time. This is a gaming state in which the average special symbol variable display time among the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state is shorter than the normal state and longer than the variable probability state. In the probability variable state in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the proportion (jackpot probability) of being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variable display per time is the normal state. It is a gaming state that is higher than the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variable state, and is the gaming state in which the average special figure variable display time is the shortest among the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state.

Here, variable display of special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in this embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIG. 18(B), the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided with eight LEDs as described above, and these LEDs constitute a special symbol. There is. In the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the LEDs to be lit are switched one by one every time 40 ms elapse, and when 40 ms has elapsed from the start of lighting of the 8th LED, The first LED starts lighting up again. In other words, in this embodiment, one cycle is defined as the process in which the LED to be lit changes in order from the first, second, third, and so on, and the periodic lighting of these LEDs is repeatedly executed. By this, variable display of special symbols is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18(D), each of the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B is provided with one LED, and these LEDs constitute a sub-symbol. In the first effect indicator light 152A and the second effect indicator lamp 152B, the LEDs are switched on and off every 60 ms. In other words, in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, one cycle consists of turning on the LED for 240 ms and turning off the LED for 240 ms, and by repeating the periodic lighting of these LEDs, the sub-symbols are displayed. A variable display of is executed.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 001SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 001SG150 shown in FIG. 19 includes a first special symbol buffer 001SG151A, a second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 001SG151C, a game control flag setting section 001SG152, and a game control timer setting section. 001SG153, a game control counter setting section 001SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 001SG155.

The first special symbol buffer 001SG151A is a special symbol game in which a game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred but has not yet been started. (Special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A) pending data is stored in the winning order.

The second special symbol buffer 001SG151B is a special symbol in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not started yet. Pending data of the game (special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B) is stored in order of winnings.

As an example, the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting winning hole with the pending number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes (enters). Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for loss performance determination, random number MR4 for fluctuation pattern type determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the random number MR1. , the numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In addition, the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the pending number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). A random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103, a random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, a random number MR3 for determining the losing performance, a random number MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern, Numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In addition, the numerical data of the pending number 0 in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B is data according to the variable display of the special symbol in progress, and the numerical data of the pending numbers 1 to 4 are still This is data (pending data) corresponding to the variable display of special symbols that have not been executed.

In this way, the pending data stored in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B is such that execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display results (special pattern display results) in these special pattern games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and the second starting winning opening In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage section, the The variable display based on the second pending storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first pending information.

The normal figure reservation storage unit 001SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 001SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR6 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In addition, the numerical data of the pending number 0 in the ordinary pattern pending storage unit 001SG151C is data corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed, and the numerical data of the pending numbers 1 to 4 are the data of the normal symbol that has not been executed yet. This is data (pending data) that corresponds to the variable display.

The game control flag setting section 001SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 001SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 001SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 001SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 001SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 001SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 in this embodiment includes a special figure display result determination random number buffer 001SG155A for temporarily storing the random number value MR1, and a random number buffer 001SG155A for temporarily storing the random number value MR2. Random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the jackpot type, Random number buffer 001SG155C for determining the loss effect for temporarily storing the value of the random number MR3, Random number for determining the variation pattern type for temporarily storing the value of the random number MR4 A buffer 001SG155D and a random number buffer 001SG155E for determining a variation pattern for temporarily storing the random number MR5 are provided.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling effect operations in addition to programs for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation for the input port 105a. As shown in FIG. 20, at input port 0, bit 1 receives a signal from the count switch 23, bit 2 receives a signal from an outlet switch (not shown), bit 3 receives a signal from a specific area switch, and bit 6 receives a signal from the normal winning port switch 24. is input. In input port 1, bit 2 receives an out confirmation switch signal 1, bit 3 receives an out confirmation switch signal 2, bit 5 receives a magnet sensor signal, and bit 7 receives a frame radio wave sensor signal. In addition, in input port 2, bit 2 receives the board proximity sensor error signal, bit 3 receives the frame proximity sensor error signal, bit 4 receives the setting key switch, bit 5 receives the touch switch, and bit 6 receives the door proximity sensor error signal. - The signal from the clear switch is input to the frame open switch, bit 7. Further, in the input port 3, a signal from the first starting port switch 22A is inputted to bit 1, a signal from the second starting port switch 22B is inputted to bit 2, and a signal from the gate switch 21 is inputted to bit 3. Further, a power supply confirmation signal is input to bit 6, and a prize ball control signal RX0 is input to bit 7.

FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation for the output port 105b. As shown in FIG. 21, signals are output from bits 1 to 8 at the output port DG1 to each LED constituting the first special symbol. At the output port DG2, signals are output from bits 1 to 8 to each LED constituting the second special symbol.

In addition, at the output port DG3, from bit 1, the starting opening winning memory number indicator light 2 (the second LED of the LEDs constituting the first reservation indicator 25A) in the first special symbol, and from bit 2, the second In the special symbol, the starting gate winning memory number indicator light 2 (the second LED of the LEDs forming the second reservation indicator 25B), and from the bit 3, the gate passage memory number indicator light 2 (constituting the normal symbol display 20). (2nd LED among the LEDs constituting the first reservation indicator 25A), bit 4 to start opening winning memory number indicator light 1 in the first special symbol (1st LED among the LEDs constituting the first reservation indicator 25A), bit 5 From bit 6, the starting gate winning memory number indicator light 1 (the first LED of the LEDs constituting the second reservation indicator 25B) in the second special symbol, and from bit 6, the gate passing memory number indicator light 1 (normal symbol display). A signal is output to each of the LEDs (the first LED among the LEDs constituting the device 20). Then, at the output port DG4, signals from bits 1 to 4 are outputted to each LED making up the normal symbol.

Furthermore, in the output port DG5, signals are output from bits 0 to 4 to each LED that constitutes the round number display 26, and from bit 5, a signal is output to the LEDs that constitute the winning indicator light 27. Bit 6 outputs a signal to the LED that constitutes the right-hand drive indicator light 28, and bit 7 outputs a signal to the LED that makes up the status indicator light 29.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has, for example, a performance control data holding area 001SG190 as shown in FIG. 22(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. is provided. The performance control data holding area 001SG190 shown in FIG. 22(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 001SG191, a performance control timer setting section 001SG192, a performance control counter setting section 001SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 001SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting unit 001SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 001SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 001SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 001SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The production control counter setting section 001SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various production operations. For example, the performance control counter setting section 001SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 001SG194A as shown in FIG. 22(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 001SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the starting prize receiving command buffer 001SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command), pending memory number notification command (the A set of four commands: 1 special figure pending memory number notification command or 2nd special figure pending memory number notification command), symbol designation command, and missed production pattern command are sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. . The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 001SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, pending storage number notification commands, and symbol designation commands. , a storage area (entry) is secured for storing the losing effect pattern commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

Furthermore, in the start-up winning reception command buffer 001SG194A in this embodiment, there is a pending display flag in which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending storage display, and a flag that is the target of the winning flash effect described later. A storage area is provided so that a winning flash effect flag, in which a flag value indicating whether or not there is a winning flash effect flag, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. , are reserved for each storage area (entry).

If execution of the pending change performance is not determined in the pending change performance determination process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending display is stored in the pending display flag, and the pending change effect is stored in the pending display flag. When it is decided to execute the performance, "1" (blue) or "2" (red) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display in a special mode (for example, blue or red) different from the normal display mode is now set. After the pending change effect determination process is executed, the pending appearance animation process, retention animation process, shift animation process, etc., which will be described later, are further executed, so that the active display and the pending display are displayed in a manner according to each pending display flag. (For example, if the value of the pending display flag is "0", the color is white with a shape that corresponds to the gaming state, and if the value of the pending display flag is "1", the color is blue with a shape that corresponds to the gaming state, and the value of the pending display flag is If it is "2", it is displayed in red with a shape corresponding to the gaming state.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 001SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered in the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 001SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, a starting opening winning winning designation command, a pending memory number notification command, a symbol designation command, and a losing effect pattern command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command, symbol designation command, and losing performance pattern command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 22(B) is sent to the entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0" entry) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is deleted. '') and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 22(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the commands stored in the buffer number "0" are deleted. ” are shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “0”. , the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4", respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in the buffer number "1-0" and ” to “1-4”, a pending display is displayed in the pending storage display area 5U. In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in the buffer number "2-0", and an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in the buffer number "2-1". A pending display is displayed in the pending storage display area 5U based on the data stored in "2-4".

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), it is determined whether the setting value confirmation condition is satisfied based on whether the gaming machine frame 3 is opened or not, the state of the setting key switch, etc. (Step S4). If the setting value confirmation condition is satisfied (step S4; Yes), the currently set setting value is displayed on the display monitor as a setting value confirmation process (step S5).

Then, after executing the set value confirmation process, or if the set value confirmation condition is not satisfied (step S4; No), after executing the recovery process (step S6), the random number circuit setting process (step S12) is performed. Execute. Through the recovery process in step S8, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

In addition, if the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), it is determined whether the set value setting condition is satisfied based on whether the gaming machine frame 3 is opened or not, the state of the setting key switch, etc. (Step S7). If the set value setting condition is satisfied (step S7; Yes), set value setting processing is executed (step S8). In the setting value setting process of this embodiment, for example, the setting value that has been set may be set by operating a touch switch and operating a setting key switch.

After executing the set value setting process, or if the set value setting condition is not satisfied (step S7; No), it is determined whether or not the set value confirmation condition is satisfied, as in step S4 and step S5. A setting value confirmation process is executed (steps 9 and 10). After executing the set value confirmation process, or if the set value confirmation condition is not satisfied (step 9; No), after executing the initialization process (step S11), execute the random number circuit setting process (step S12). do.

The initialization process in step S11 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S12), the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). (Step S13), and the interrupt is permitted (Step S14). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the normal winning opening switch 24 (step S21). Next, a timer subtraction process is performed to subtract various timer values related to the game (for example, the values of the normal symbol process timer, starting opening 2 or more winning error invalidation timer, security information timer, information output extension timer, and illegal winning notification invalidation timer). After executing (Step S22), a starting hole 2 abnormal winnings monitoring process (Step S23) for monitoring whether an abnormal winning to the second starting winning hole has occurred, and whether or not the game ball has entered various winning holes. A winning notification process (step S24) for transmitting a winning designation command based on the occurrence of an abnormal winning and an error command indicating the abnormal winning based on the occurrence of the abnormal winning to the production control board 12, and a winning notification process for notifying the occurrence of a magnet error. Magnet error notification processing (step S25), radio wave error notification processing to notify the occurrence of a radio wave error (step S26), switch error notification processing to check for disconnections or disconnections in the wiring of various switches (step S27), and switch By diagnosing the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing the abnormal error notification process (step S28) and the ejected ball error notification process (step S29) for notifying the ejected ball error, if necessary according to the diagnosis result. It is possible to generate a warning if After this, a random number update process (step S30) for updating at least a part of the random numbers for gaming such as the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR6 for determining the regular figure display result, the random number MR1 and the random number MR6 are performed. A random number update process for initial value determination (step S31) for updating the random value MR7 for determining the initial value of the numerical value MR6, a special symbol process process (step S32) that performs variable display of special symbols, control to jackpot gaming state, etc. ), normal symbol process processing (step S33) that performs variable display of normal symbols, control of solenoids 81 and 82 as opening control of the jackpot in the jackpot game state and second start winning opening control according to the winning of the jackpot. (step S34), jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, starting information (number of starting winnings, etc.) Information output processing (step S35) that outputs data such as probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state etc.), etc.), and awarding prize balls according to the winnings in each winning opening. Prize ball processing (step S36), display processing for setting data for lighting up the LEDs that constitute the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, and the regular game reservation display 25C (step S37), the game Test terminal processing (step S38) to output a test signal so that the control state of the machine can be checked outside the gaming machine, and output the content related to the connection signal and the content related to the solenoid in the RAM area of output port 0 to the output port. Output processing (step S39), special symbol display control processing (step S39) that sets special symbol display control data for variable display of special symbols according to the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data; Step S40), normal symbol display control processing for setting normal symbol display control data for variable display of normal symbols according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data (step S41) , frame state output processing (step S42) of transmitting a command in which information indicating the error state of the gaming machine is set to the production control board 12 in order to display the error state of the gaming machine, etc.; Based on the data, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the normal symbol display 20, the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C, etc. are configured. display control processing to control the lighting of the LED (step S43), setting key confirmation processing to check the status of the setting key switch (step S44), displaying the base value etc. on the display monitor provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. After executing the performance display monitor control process (step S45) and permitting the interrupt (step S46), the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(switch processing)
Next, the switch processing (step S21) in the timer interrupt processing will be explained. In this embodiment, when the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passing continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that the switch has indeed been turned on, and processing corresponding to the switch-on is started. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing each 2-byte buffer formed in the RAM 102 used in switch processing. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the previous switch on/off determination result (for example, 4 ms ago) is stored. The port buffer is a buffer in which the contents of port 3 input this time are stored. The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which a corresponding bit is set to 1 when a switch is detected to be on, and a corresponding bit is set to 0 when a switch is detected to be off.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch processing in step S21. In the switch process, the CPU 103 first inputs the data input to the input port 3 (step S51), and sets the input data in the port buffer (step S52).

Next, the initial value of the weight counter formed in the RAM 102 is set (step 53), and the value of the weight counter is subtracted by 1 until the value of the weight counter becomes 0 (steps S54, S55).

When the value of the wait counter becomes 0, the data of input port 3 is inputted again (step S56), and a logical AND is performed for each bit between the inputted data and the data set in the port buffer (step S56). S57). Then, the result of the AND operation is set in the port buffer (step S58). Through the processing of steps S53 to S58, out of the two input data input from input port 0 at a time interval of approximately [initial value of weight counter x (processing time of steps S104 and S105)], both Only bits that are set to "1" become "1" in the port buffer. That is, when the detection signal of the switch continues to be on for a predetermined period of [initial value of wait counter x (processing time of steps S54 and S55)], the corresponding bit in the port buffer becomes "1".

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs exclusive OR on a bit-by-bit basis between the data set in the port buffer last time and the data set in the port buffer (step S59). In the exclusive OR operation result, the bit corresponding to the switch for which the previous switch on/off determination result (for example, 4 ms ago) is different from the current switch on/off determination result is " 1”. The CPU 103 further performs a logical product for each bit between the exclusive OR operation result and the data set in the port buffer (step S60). As a result, among the bits (according to the exclusive OR operation result) corresponding to the switches for which the previous switch on/off determination result and the switch on/off determination result determined to be on this time are different, the bits that are currently on Only the bit corresponding to the switch determined to be ``1'' (based on the logical AND operation) remains.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the logical product calculation result in step S60 in the switch-on buffer (step S61), and sets the contents of the port buffer in which the calculation result in step S108 has been set in the previous port buffer (step S62). .

Through the above processing, among the switches that have been in the on state continuously for a predetermined period of time, the switch whose previous switch on/off determination result (for example, 4 ms ago) was off, that is, the switch has changed from the off state to the on state. The bit corresponding to the switch is set to "1" in the switch-on buffer.

(Random number update processing)
Next, the random number update process (step S30) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of random number update processing. In the random number update process, the CPU 103 first specifies the value of the random number counter for judging the special figure display result (the value of the random number MR1) (step 71), and when the value of the random number counter for judging the special figure display result reaches the maximum value. It is determined whether or not (step S72). If the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result has not reached the maximum value (step S72; N), the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step S75 (step S73). If the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result has reached the maximum value (step S72; Y), the minimum value 1 is set in the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result, and the process proceeds to step S75. The process proceeds (step S74).

In step S75, the CPU 103 compares the current value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result with the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result (step S75). Then, it is determined whether the current value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result are the same value (step S76). If the current value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result are the same value (step S76; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result That is, the random number MR7 value, which is a random number for determining the initial value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, is extracted (step S77), and the value of the extracted random number MR7 is used as the random number for determining the special figure display result. At the same time as setting it in the counter (step S78), the value of the extracted random number MR7 is stored as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result (step S79).

After executing step S79, or if the current value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result are not the same value (step S76; N), the CPU 103 The value of the random number counter for determining the general figure display result (the value of random number MR6) is specified (step 80), and it is determined whether the value of the random number counter for determining the ordinary figure display result has reached the maximum value (step S81). If the value of the random number counter for ordinary figure display result determination has not reached the maximum value (step S81; N), the value of the ordinary figure display result determination random number counter is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step S84 (step S82). If the value of the random number counter for determining the general figure display result has reached the maximum value (step S81; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the ordinary figure display result is set to 1, which is the minimum value, and the process proceeds to step S84. Proceed (step S83).

In step S84, the CPU 103 compares the current value of the random number counter for determining the general figure display result with the initial value of the random number counter for determining the ordinary figure display result (step S84). Then, it is determined whether the current value of the random number counter for determining the display result of ordinary figures and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of ordinary figures display are the same value (step S85). If the current value of the random number counter for determining the ordinary figure display result and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the ordinary figure display result are the same value (step S85; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the ordinary figure display result That is, the random number MR7 value, which is a random number for determining the initial value of the random number MR6 for determining the result of displaying a common figure, is extracted (step S86), and the value of the extracted random number MR7 is used as the random number for determining the result of displaying a common figure. At the same time as setting it in the counter (step S87), the value of the extracted random number MR7 is stored as the initial value of the random number counter for general figure display result determination (step S88), and the random number updating process is ended. Incidentally, if the current value of the random number counter for determining the display result of ordinary figures and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of ordinary figures display are not the same value (step S85; N), steps S86 to S88 are executed. The random number update process ends without any error.

In this embodiment, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR6 for determining the regular figure display result both take values from 1 to 65536, so in step S74 described above, the special figure display result is Although the value of the random number counter for judgment is set to 1, and the value of the random number counter for judgment of normal figure display result is set to 1 in step S83 described above, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of possible values of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR6 for determining the regular figure display result is set to 0 to 65535, and in step S74 described above, the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result is set. 0. In step S83 described above, the values of the random number counters for determining the ordinary figure display result may be set to 0.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S32 shown in FIG. 24 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the game ball has won in either the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole by referring to the input port 3 shown in FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not a starting prize has occurred (step S100). When a game ball wins in either the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening (step S100; Y), a starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S101).

In the starting port switch passage process, the occurrence of a starting prize is detected, the pending information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and the pending storage number is updated. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. Further, when the reservation information and the number of reservation memories are stored, a production control command is transmitted to the production control board 12 for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of reservation memories, and the determination results such as pre-reading determination.

After executing the starting port switch passing process in step S101, or when no game ball has won in either the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port (step S100; N), the CPU 103 stores the data in the RAM 102. Depending on the value of the provided special figure process flag, one of the processes in steps S110 to S116 is selected and executed. In addition, in each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S116), a process of transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority play). ). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, the process of determining the fluctuating pattern into one of multiple types using a random value for determining the fluctuating pattern based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot" ( (variation pattern setting) is also performed.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variable display time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbols. It specifies the contents of the content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "1". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, if the display result is a “jackpot”, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to “3”, and if the display result is a “loss”, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to “0”. be done. When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big prize opening pre-opening process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". This pre-opening process includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot to open based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is included. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", and the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". The value is updated to "6". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start port switch passage processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passing process (S101) shown in FIG. 28. In the starting opening switch passing process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting opening switch 22A is activated based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether it is on (001SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (001SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (001SGS102). The CPU 103 specifies the first special figure pending memory number by reading the first special figure pending memory count value, which is the stored value of the first special figure pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, for example. I wish I could. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 001SGS102 (001SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 001SG155 is set to "0" (001SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 001SGS101 (001SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in 001SGS102 (001SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (001SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (001SGS104; Y), the number of second special pattern pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the second special pattern, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (001SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 specifies the second special figure pending memory number by reading the second special figure pending memory count value, which is the stored value of the second special figure pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154. I wish I could. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 001SGS105 (001SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 001SG155 is set to "2" (001SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 001SGS103 and 001SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (001SGS107). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the first special figure pending memory number count value is added by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special figure pending memory number count value is added. Add 1. In this way, the first special figure pending storage number count value is calculated when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. , is updated to increase by 1. In addition, the second special figure pending memory number count value is calculated when the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. , is updated to increase by 1. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (001SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 001SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 001SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 001SG154. A random number MR2, a random number MR3 for determining a missed performance, a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type, a random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern are extracted, and the extracted random number MR1 is sent to the random number buffer 001SG155A for determining the special figure display result. , the extracted random number MR2 is placed in the random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the jackpot type, the extracted random number MR3 is placed in the random number buffer 001SG155C for determining the winning performance, the extracted random number MR4 is placed in the random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the variation pattern type, and the extracted random number MR5 is placed in the random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the variation pattern type. Each is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155E for fluctuation pattern determination (001SGS109 to 001SGS118).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the transfer destinations of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B from the starting opening buffer value and the pending memory number count value corresponding to the starting opening buffer value ( 001SGS119). Then, the random numbers stored in the random number buffer 001SG155A for special figure display result determination, the random number buffer 001SG155B for jackpot type determination, the random number buffer 001SG155C for losing performance determination, the random number buffer 001SG155D for fluctuation pattern type determination, and the random number buffer 001SG155E for fluctuation pattern determination. The numerical values MR1 to MR5 are transferred to the transfer destination set in step 001SGS19 (001SGS120).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the losing performance, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the processes of 001SGS109 to 001SGS120, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining variable display modes including variable display results and variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols, It is stored as pending information (pending memory).

That is, in the starting port switch passing process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. , and the extracted random numbers MR1 to MR5 are temporarily stored in the game control buffer setting unit 001SGS155 in the random number buffer 001SG155A for special figure display result determination, the random number buffer 001SG155B for jackpot type determination, the random number buffer 001SG155C for loss performance determination, It is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155D for fluctuation pattern type determination and the random number buffer 001SG155E for fluctuation pattern determination. Then, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the CPU 103 inserts a random number buffer for special pattern display result determination into the head of an empty entry among the entries with reservation numbers "1" to "4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A. Transfer the values of random numbers MR1 to MR5 stored in 001SG155A, random number buffer for jackpot type determination 001SG155B, random number buffer for losing performance determination 001SG155C, random number buffer for fluctuation pattern type determination 001SG155D, random number buffer for fluctuation pattern determination 001SG155E, Stored as a retained memory.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 93, the storage and transfer of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 when a winning occurs in the first starting opening has been explained, but when a winning occurs in the second starting opening, special Random numbers MR1~ stored in the random number buffer 001SG155A for diagram display result determination, the random number buffer 001SG155B for jackpot type determination, the random number buffer 001SG155C for losing performance determination, the random number buffer 001SG155D for fluctuation pattern type determination, and the random number buffer 001SG155E for fluctuation pattern determination. Since the transfer destination of the value of MR5 is only the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, the explanation will be omitted.

In FIG. 29, after executing the winning effect processing (001SGS122), the CPU 103 stores the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. , sends a pending storage number notification command to the production control board 12 (001SGS123).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting port buffer value is "0" (001SGS124). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "0" (001SGS124; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (001SGS126), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (001SGS124;N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (001SGS125), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Processing when winning a prize)
FIG. 30(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 001SGS122 of FIG. 29 as the winning presentation process. When the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts, it is determined whether or not the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state by special symbol normal processing described later. will be held. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole or second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning effect process of step 001SGS112. , it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which winning performance pattern the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. As such, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the prize-winning performance process shown in FIG. The setting value set is specified (step 001SGS131). In the process of step 001SGS131, for example, it may be determined whether or not the set value is set to a normal value (for example, "1"). Further, if an abnormal value is set as a setting value, a process may be executed to output a command indicating that the abnormal value has been set to the outside.

Following the process of step 001SGS131, the CPU 103 selects and sets the special figure display result determination table (step 001SGS132). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 001SGS109 of FIG. 29 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 001SGS133). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table selected by the process of step 001SGS132 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 001SGS133 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 001SGS133; N), in response to the variable display result being "miss", A first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command, is transmitted (step 001SGS134), and the losing effect determination table shown in FIG. 10 is selected (step 001SGS135). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the losing performance extracted in step 001SGS113 of FIG. 29 is within the non-reach determination range (step 001SGS136). If the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 is within the non-reach judgment range (step 001SGS136; Y), a winning performance pattern designation command (see Fig. 30 (B)) corresponding to the non-reach is transmitted and the winning performance is executed. When the process ends (step 001SGS144), and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 is outside the determination range of non-reach (step 001SGS136; N), it is determined whether the probability change flag is set, that is, the gaming state is determined to be probability change. It is determined whether it is in the state (high-accuracy/high-base state) (step 001SGS137).

If the probability variation flag is set (step 001SGS137; Y), set the variation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11(C) and proceed to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS141); if the probability variation flag is not set (Step 001SGS137; N) further determines whether or not a time saving flag is set, that is, whether the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state) (Step 001SGS138). If the time saving flag is not set (step 001SGS138; N), set the fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11(A) and proceed to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS139).
If the time saving flag is set (step 001SGS138; Y), the fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11(B) is set and the process proceeds to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS140).

In step 001SGS142, the CPU 103 determines a losing performance pattern based on the variation pattern type determination table set in any of steps 001SGS139 to 001SGS141 and the numerical data of the random number MR4 (step 001SGS42). Then, if the numerical data of the random number MR4 is within the range of the normal reach judgment value, the failure effect pattern command according to the normal reach, and the numerical data of the random number MR4 are judged as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ. If it is within the value range, a losing effect pattern command (see FIG. 30(B)) corresponding to the super reach is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the winning effect process is ended (step 001SGS143).

In addition, if the numerical data of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in step 001SGS133 (step 001SGS133; Y), the CPU 103 uses the numerical data of the random number MR2 and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(A). The jackpot type is determined (step 001SGS145), a symbol designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type is transmitted to the performance control board 12, and the winning performance process is ended (step 001SGS146).

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 28 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 001SGS151). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 001SGS151, it is sufficient to read out the second special figure pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending memory number is other than "0" at step 001SGS151 (step 001SGS151; N), after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (Step 001SGS153), the process proceeds to Step 001SGS157.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 001SGS151; Y), it is further determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 001SGS154). The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 001SGS154, it is sufficient to read out the first special symbol pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 001SGS154 (step 001SGS154; N), after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (Step 001SGS156), the process proceeds to Step 001SGS157. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

In the process of step 001SGS157, the special figure pending storage number count value corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is decremented by 1. For example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure pending memory count value is -1, and if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the first special figure reservation memory count value is -1.
All you have to do is decrement the special figure pending memory count value by 1.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol determination process (step 001SGS158) for determining whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, and a variation pattern setting process (step 001SGS159) for determining a variation pattern, and then executes a special symbol process. The flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process and the special symbol normal process is ended (step 001SGS160).

In addition, if the first special figure pending storage number is 0 in step 001SGS154 (step 001SGS154; Y), the CPU 103 sends settings and commands (for example, a demo display effect designation command) for executing the demo display effect. Execute and end the special symbol normal processing (step 001SGS161). In addition, when the CPU 103 executes settings and sends commands for executing the demonstration display performance in step 001SGS61, although the variable display of special symbols can be executed, the first special symbol pending storage number and the second Since the number of reserved special symbols is 0, the machine enters a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed.

(Special symbol determination process)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 31. In the special symbol determination process, the CPU 103 first executes a special symbol buffer shift process (step 001SGS171). For example, as shown in FIG. 33, the special symbol buffer shift process determines whether the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" or not, that is, the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not (step 001SGS181).

When the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" (step 001SGS181; Y), the contents of the entry with reservation number "1" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A shown in FIG. 19 are replaced with the contents of the entry with reservation number "0". (Step 001SGS182). Furthermore, the contents of the entry with reservation number "2" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A are overwritten as the contents of the entry with reservation number "1" (step 001SGS183), and the contents of the entry with reservation number "3" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A are overwritten as the contents of the entry with reservation number "1". The contents of the entry with the reservation number "2" are overwritten as the contents of the entry with the reservation number "2" (step 001SGS184), and the contents of the entry with the reservation number "4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A are overwritten as the contents of the entry with the reservation number "3" ( Step 001SGS185), the contents of the entry of pending number "4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A are cleared (step 001SGS186).

In this way, by executing the processing from step 001SGS182 to step 00SGS186, the shift of the upper entry of the pending storage is realized in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A.

Then, in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A, a first special symbol pending storage number notification command corresponding to the number of entries in which numerical data of random numbers MR1 to MR5 are stored is sent to the production control board 12, and the special symbol buffer is The shift process ends (step 001SGS187).

On the other hand, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2" (step 001SGS181; N), the entry contents of the reservation number "1" in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B shown in FIG. 19 are changed to the entry contents of the reservation number "0". It is overwritten as the contents of the entry (step 001SGS188). Furthermore, the contents of the entry with reservation number "2" in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B are overwritten as the contents of the entry with reservation number "1" (step 001SGS189), and the contents of the entry with reservation number "3" in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B are overwritten. The contents of the entry with the reservation number "2" are overwritten as the contents of the entry with the reservation number "2" (step 001SGS190), and the contents of the entry with the reservation number "4" in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B are overwritten as the contents of the entry with the reservation number "3" ( Step 001SGS191), the contents of the entry of pending number "4" in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B are cleared (step 001SGS192).

In this way, by executing the processing from step 001SGS188 to step 00SGS192, the shift of the upper entry of the pending storage is realized in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B.

Then, in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, a second special symbol pending storage number notification command corresponding to the number of entries in which numerical data of random numbers MR1 to MR5 are stored is sent to the production control board 12, and the special symbol buffer The shift process ends (step 001SGS193).

That is, in the special symbol buffer shift process in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94(A) to 94(E) and 95(A) to 95(F), the CPU 103 94. In the example shown in FIG. 95, in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A), regardless of the number of pending memories stored, the stored contents of the entry with pending number "1" are first copied to the entry with pending number "0". Perform the processing to do. Next, the CPU 103 copies the stored contents of the entry with hold number "2" to the entry with hold number "1", and copies the stored contents of the entry with hold number "3" to the entry with hold number "2". The process of copying the stored contents of the entry with the pending number "4" to the entry with the pending number "3" is sequentially executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 95(E), when the special symbol buffer process is executed when the number of pending memories is 4, the stored contents of the entry with pending number "4" are transferred to the stored contents of the entry with pending number "3". When the process of copying to the entry is executed, the same data exists in the entry with hold number "3" and the entry with hold number "4" (the entry with hold number "3" and the entry with hold number "4" The data of the entry with the pending number "4" before the execution of the special symbol buffer process is stored in both. Therefore, in the special symbol buffer process of this embodiment, the number of pending memories is reduced by finally erasing (clearing) the stored contents of the entry with pending number "4".

Furthermore, in the special symbol buffer shift process in this embodiment, if the number of pending memories is four, the entry with the pending number "3" and the entry with the pending number "4" are separated as shown in FIG. 95(E). Since a situation occurs where the same data exists, it is necessary to execute a process to erase the memory contents of the entry with reservation number "4", but as shown in FIG. 94, the number of reservations stored is 3 or less. In this case, there is no need to execute the process of erasing the stored contents of the entry with reservation number "4". However, if the processing contents of the special symbol buffer shift process are changed depending on the number of pending memories stored, the amount of data for executing the special symbol buffer shift process will increase, so in this embodiment, , common processing regardless of the number of pending memories stored (processing to copy the memory contents of the entry with pending number "2" to the entry with pending number "1", copying the stored contents of the entry with pending number "3" processing to copy to the entry with hold number "2", process to copy the stored contents of the entry with hold number "4" to the entry with hold number "3", and process to erase the stored contents of the entry with hold number "4") By executing this, the increase in the amount of data for executing the special symbol buffer shift process is suppressed.

Returning to the special symbol determination process in FIG. 32, the CPU 103 reads random numbers MR1 to MR5 from the entry of the reservation number "0" in the special symbol buffer according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 001SGS172). Then, the set value is specified (step 001SGS173), a display result determination table corresponding to the set value is selected (step 001SGS174), and the read random value MR1 is the jackpot determination value in the selected display result determination table. It is determined whether or not it is within the range (step 001SGS175). In addition, in the process of step 00SGS175, if the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state, it is determined whether the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value in these normal state or time saving state, and the gaming state is changed. When is in a variable probability state, it may be determined whether the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value in the variable probability state.

If the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of the large value judgment value, it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is turned on (step 001SGS176). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 001SGS177). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the read random number MR2 for jackpot type determination and the "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", and "probable variable jackpot" are displayed in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each of the jackpot types of "B" and "probable variable jackpot C" matches, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types will be used (step 001SGS178).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 001SGS178, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed into a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state (which is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving state). Which gaming state to control (high-certain, high-base state) is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 001SGS179), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

Further, after executing step 001SGS179 or in step 001SGS175, if it is determined that the value of the random number MR1 is not within the range of the jackpot determination value, that is, it is determined to be a "miss" (step 001SGS175; N), the CPU 103 Confirmed special symbols are set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not) and the jackpot type determination result when the jackpot gaming state is set. The special symbol determination process ends (step 001SGS180). In the process of step 001SGS180, for example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", the two upper and lower LEDs arranged at the left end of the LEDs constituting the special symbol display device are In response to the predetermined result that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot", the eight LEDs that make up the special symbol display device are lit in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot. What is necessary is to decide (excluding the above-mentioned combinations).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 001SGS159 of FIG. 31 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first determines whether the variable display result is a jackpot (step 001SGS201). If the variable display result is not a jackpot, that is, a loss (step 001SGS201; N), select the loss effect determination table shown in FIG. A losing performance (presence or absence of a reach performance) is determined based on the selected losing performance determination table (step 001SGS202b). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect (step 001SGS202c).

If you do not want to perform a reach effect as a losing effect, that is, if you want a non-reach variation pattern (step 001SGS202c; N), proceed to step 001SGS202f, and if you want to execute a reach effect as a missed effect, that is, if you want a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach. If a pattern is selected (step 001SGS202c; Y), a variable pattern type determination table (see FIG. 11) corresponding to the gaming state is selected (step 001SGS202d). For example, if the gaming state is a normal state, select the variable pattern type determination table A, if the gaming state is a time saving state, select the variable pattern type determination table B, and if the gaming state is a fixed variable state, select the variable pattern type determination table A. Pattern type determination table C may be selected.

Then, based on the random number MR4 read out in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 32 and the selected variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type (ready-to-reach effect to be executed) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 001SGS202f (step 001SGS202e).

In step 001SGS202f, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table for a loss (see FIGS. 13 to 15) according to the game state, number of pending memories, etc., in addition to the above-described loss performance and variation pattern type, and steps The process advances to 001SGS203 (step 001SGS202f).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a jackpot (step 001SGS201; Y), a variable pattern determination table for jackpot (see FIG. 16) according to the gaming state is selected and the process proceeds to step 001SGS203.

Then, in the process of step 001SGS203, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR5 read out in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 32 and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 001SGS203, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 001SGS204). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 001SGS204, various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol are transmitted (step 001SGS205). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start designation, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. A result designation command and a first special figure pending memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start designation, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A result designation command and a second special figure pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted.

After executing the process of step 001SGS205, a special symbol variable display time which is a variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern setting process is ended (step 001SGS206). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. The required time.

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 28 as the special symbol variation process. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 increments the variable display time timer value by -1 (step 001SGS207), and determines whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 001SGS208a). If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 001SGS208a; N), the special symbol fluctuation process is ended, and if the variable display time timer has timed out (step 001SGS208a; Y), the value of the special symbol process flag is It is updated to a value according to the special symbol stop processing and the special symbol variation processing is ended (step 001SGS08b).

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S112 of FIG. 28 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S113 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 001SGS211). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, a symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board 12 (step 001SGS212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 001SGS213).

If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 001SGS213; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 001SGS214). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), win start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Send any of the hit start 4 designation commands (non-probability variable) (step 001SGS215).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 001SGS216).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 001SGS217). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 001SGS218). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S113), and the special symbol stop process is ended (step 001SGS219).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 001SGS213; N), it is determined in step 001SGS220 whether or not the time saving flag is on (step 001SGS220). If the time saving flag is off (step 001SGS220; N), proceed to step 001SGS25, and if the time saving flag is on (step 001SGS220; Y), check whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. Determination is made (step 001SGS221). When the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 001SGS221; Y), the process advances to step 001SGS225.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 001SGS221; N), that is, if the time saving number of times remains and is in a high base state, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by 1 (step 001SGS222). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 001SGS223), and if it is not "0" (step 001SGS223; N), the process proceeds to step 001SGS225, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (step 001SGS223; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off, and the process proceeds to step 001SGS225 (step 001SGS224).

In step 001SGS225, a gaming state designation command is transmitted according to the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 001SGS226).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S116 of FIG. 28 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 001SGS231). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 001SGS231; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 001SGS232), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 001SGS231; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 001SGS233). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 001SGS234). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 001SGS234; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 001SGS235).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability variable jackpot (step 001SGS235; N), the probability variation flag and time saving flag are turned on (step 001SGS237, step 001SGS238). Further, the time saving number counter is set to "0" (step 001SGS239), and the process proceeds to step 001SGS242.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 001SGS235; Y), step 001SGS240 and step 001SGS241 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 001SGS242.

In step 001SGS242, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted (step 001SGS243). Then, after transmitting a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 001SGS244), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the normal process, and the jackpot end process is ended (step 001SGS245).

(Display processing)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S37 of FIG. 24 as the display process. In the display process, the CPU 103 first specifies the starting port buffer value and the special figure process flag value (step 001SGS251, step 001SGS252). In addition, the first special figure pending memory number count value and the second special figure pending memory number count value, that is, the first special figure pending memory number and the second special figure pending memory number are specified (step 001SGS253). Then, lighting data for the LEDs in the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is set in accordance with these specified contents.

For example, as shown in FIG. 39(A), when the starting opening buffer value is 1 and the number of second special symbols reserved is 0, the special symbol process flag value is 0 and the number of first special symbols reserved is 1. In this case, even if the LED of the first reservation display 25A is turned on in a manner corresponding to the number of reservation memories (1), the variable display based on the reservation memory will be started at the next interrupt, and the LED will turn off. (all the LEDs that make up the first hold display 25A are turned off), so data is set so that the LED of the first hold display 25A is not turned on, and the special figure process flag value is set to 0 to 6. When the number of one special figure pending memory is 2 to 4, even if variable display based on the first special figure pending memory is started at the next interruption, the LED constituting the first pending display 25A Since either one of them lights up, data is set so that the LED of the first reservation display 25A lights up in a manner according to the total number of reservation memories.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 39(B), when the starting opening buffer value is 1 and the second special symbol pending memory number is one or more, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. From this, data is set so that the LED of the first reservation display 25A is lit in a manner corresponding to the total number of reservation memories, regardless of the special figure process flag value and the number of first special symbol reservation memories.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 39(C), when the starting port buffer value is 2, the special figure process flag value is 0, and when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1, the second pending display Even if the LED of the display 25B is turned on in a manner corresponding to the number of pending memories (1), the variable display based on the pending memory is started at the next interrupt, and the LED is turned off (the second pending display 25B is turned off). (All the constituent LEDs are turned off), so data is set so that the LED of the second reservation display 25B is not turned on, the special figure process flag value is 0 to 6, and the second special figure reservation memory number is 2 to 4. In the case of 1, even if the variable display based on the 1st 2nd special symbol pending memory is started at the time of the next interruption, any of the LEDs constituting the 2nd pending display 25B will light up. Data is set so that the LED of the second hold display 25B is lit in a manner corresponding to the total number of memories.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the lighting data of the LED in the ordinary figure reservation display 25C according to the number of ordinary figures pending storage (step 001SGS255).

The data settings for lighting the LEDs of the first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B, and regular hold indicator 25C described above include setting the LEDs to turn on at the output port DG3 shown in FIG. It is sufficient to set the corresponding bit to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off to "0".

Further, the CPU 103 specifies the gaming state and, if the specified gaming state is a jackpot gaming state, further specifies the jackpot type (step 001SGS256). Then, the lighting data of each LED in the round number indicator 26, hit indicator light 27, right-handed indicator light 28, and status indicator light 29 is set according to the specified gaming state and jackpot type, and the display process is completed ( Step 001SGS257).

The data settings for lighting up the LEDs of the round number indicator 26, hit indicator light 27, right hit indicator light 28, and status indicator light 29 are as follows: The bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off may be set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off to "0".

(Special symbol display control processing)
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S40 of FIG. 24 as the special symbol display control process. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 1, that is, whether or not any special symbol is being displayed variably (step 001SGS261). If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 1 (step 001SGS261; N), the special symbol display control process is ended, and if the value of the special symbol process flag is 1 (step 001SGS261; Y), the variable special symbol is specified. The buffer value, that is, which variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed is specified (step 001SGS262), and the value of the variable display time timer is specified (step 001SGS263). Then, according to the specified variable special symbol designation buffer value and variable display time timer value, the lighting data of the LEDs in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to control the special symbol display. The process ends (step 001SGS264).

In addition, the data settings for lighting the LEDs of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B described above correspond to the LEDs to be lit at the output port DG1 and the output port DG2 shown in FIG. The bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off may be set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off to "0".

Although not particularly shown, in the normal symbol display control process (step S41), the normal symbol display control process (step S41) determines whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed and the value of the variable display time timer of the normal symbol. It is sufficient to set the lighting data of the LEDs (in the output port DG4 shown in FIG. 21, set the bits corresponding to the LEDs to be turned on to "1" and the bits corresponding to the LEDs to be turned off to "0").

(Display control processing)
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S43 of FIG. 24 as the display control process. The display control process is performed by the special figure unit based on the data ("1" or "0" set in the bit of each output port DG shown in FIG. 21) created in the display process and special figure display control process described above. This is a process for lighting up each LED constituting 201. In the display control process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the DG counter value is 4, which is the maximum value (step 001SGS271). Note that the DG counter is a counter for selecting which of the output ports DG1, DG2, DG3, and DG4 shown in FIG. LEDs constituting the symbol display device 4A, LEDs constituting the second special symbol display device 4B, LEDs constituting the first pending display 25A, second pending display 25B, and normal symbol pending display 25C, normal symbol display This is a counter for determining which of the LEDs constituting 20 is to be lit.

If the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS271; Y), set the DG counter value to 1 and proceed to step 001SGS274 (step 001SGS272); if the DG counter value is other than 4 (step 001SGS271; N), , increments the DG counter value by 1 and proceeds to step 001SGS274 (step 001SGS273).

In step 001SGS274, the CPU 103 determines whether the DG counter value is 1 or not. When the DG counter value is 1 (Step 001SGS274; Y), the output of the drive signal from the output port DG5 is stopped (Step 001SGS275), and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG1 is started to perform display control processing. (Step 001SGS276). In other words, when the DG counter value is 1, by outputting a drive signal from the output port DG1, the LEDs (LEDs forming the first special symbol display device 4A) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG1 are activated. Performs lighting control.

Furthermore, if the DG counter value is not 1 (step 001SGS274; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 2 (step 001SGS277). When the DG counter value is 2 (step 001SGS277; Y), the output of the drive signal from the output port DG1 is stopped (step 001SGS278), and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG2 is started to perform display control processing. (Step 001SGS279). In other words, when the DG counter value is 2, by outputting the drive signal from the output port DG2, the LEDs (LEDs forming the second special symbol display device 4B) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG2 are activated. Performs lighting control.

If the DG counter value is not 2 (step 001SGS277; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 3 (step 001SGS280). When the DG counter value is 3 (step 001SGS280; Y), the output of the drive signal from the output port DG2 is stopped (step 001SGS281), and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG3 is started to perform display control processing. (Step 001SGS282). In other words, when the DG counter value is 3, by outputting the drive signal from the output port DG3, the LEDs (first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B) according to each bit of the output port DG3 , and controls the lighting of the LEDs constituting the general figure hold display 25C.

If the DG counter value is not 3 (step 001SGS280; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS283). When the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS283; Y), the output of the drive signal from the output port DG3 is stopped (step 001SGS284), and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG4 is started to perform display control processing. (Step 001SGS285). In other words, when the DG counter value is 4, by outputting a drive signal from the output port DG4, lighting control of the LED (the LED forming the normal symbol display 20) is controlled according to each bit of the output port DG4. I do.

Furthermore, if the DG counter value is not 4 (step 001SGS283; N), it is assumed that the DG counter value is 5, and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG4 is stopped (step 001SGS286), and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG5 is stopped. The output of the drive signal is started and the display control process is ended (step 001SGS287). In other words, when the DG counter value is 5, by outputting the drive signal from the output port DG5, the LEDs (round number indicator 26, hit indicator light 27, right-handed Controls the lighting of the LEDs constituting the indicator light 28 and status indicator light 29.

That is, in the present embodiment, the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A, the LEDs constituting the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, and the ordinary symbol reservation display The LEDs constituting the device 25C, the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display 20, the round number display 26, the hit indicator light 27, the right hit indicator light 28, and the status indicator light 29 are controlled at the interrupt cycle of the CPU 103. By changing the LED to be emitted every 4 ms, a 16 ms off state and a 4 ms on state are periodically repeated.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a starting prize is generated by executing the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 24, as shown in FIG. After the determination of the occurrence of the starting prize and the transmission of the command (starting opening winning designation command) corresponding to the occurrence of the starting prize, display processing and display control processing are executed, thereby displaying the hold display corresponding to the starting winning. Light emission control of (first hold indicator 25A or second hold indicator 25B) is started.

In addition, when the variable display of special symbols is executed, as shown in FIG. After the transmission of is executed, display processing and display control processing are executed, so that light emission control in the mode after subtraction of the number of pending memories is started on the pending display in response to the start of the variable display. It has become.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 42(C), the special symbol display control process and the display control process are executed to display the special symbol according to the variable display. After the light emission control of the device is started, subtraction of the variable display time (variable display time timer) is started in the special symbol variation process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 creates a pending memory that can specify the number of pending memories including the new pending memory based on the occurrence of a new pending memory while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. Although a mode in which a number notification command is sent to the production control CPU 120 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 sends a command indicating that the new pending storage has occurred (for example, pending storage). You may send a memory number increase notification command) to the production control CPU 120. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the first sub-holding display 151A and the second sub-holding display 151B according to the number of pending memories based on the reception of the above-mentioned pending memory number notification command and pending storage number increase notification command. The light may be turned on in a certain manner.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 sends to the performance control CPU 120 a pending memory number notification command that can specify the number of pending memories after the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the CPU 103 simply sends a command indicating that the number of pending memories has decreased (for example, based on the start of variable display of special symbols). A memory number reduction notification command) may be sent to the production control CPU 120. In addition, the production control CPU 120 causes the first sub-holding display 151A and the second sub-holding display 151B to variably display special symbols based on the reception of the above-mentioned pending memory number notification command and pending storage number decrease notification command. The light may be turned on in a manner corresponding to the number of pending memories after the start of the process.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S153). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S153; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S153 (step S153; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S154), and command analysis processing is executed (step S155). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S155, the production control process process is executed (step S156). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S156, a performance random number update process is executed (step S157), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value update process (step S157), a demonstration performance control process (step S158) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and an operation to accept the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A are performed. A reception control process (step S158a) and a background display update process (step S159) for updating the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S153. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In addition, in the demonstration production control process, the production control CPU 120 receives a command (for example, a demonstration display production designation command) from the CPU 103 to execute the demonstration display production, so that no new pending storage is generated. Control is executed to display a guidance display on the image display device 5 on the condition that 30 seconds (3000ms) have elapsed, and an image is displayed on the condition that 30 seconds (3000ms) have elapsed without any new pending storage. What is necessary is to execute control to display an image of a demonstration display effect on the display device 5. Further, if a new pending memory occurs while images of guidance display or demonstration display performance are being displayed, control may be executed to stop displaying these images of guidance display or demonstration display performance.

In addition, in the operation reception process, the performance control CPU 120 uses the push button 31B or Based on the reception of the operation of the stick controller 31A, a menu screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and further, by accepting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A while the menu screen is displayed, the speaker 8L is activated. , 8R may perform control to change the volume of the sound output and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, control is performed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 based on a change in the game state or a decision to change the production mode at the start of variable display. is now possible.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration performance may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S156 of FIG. 43 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 43, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a performance mode determination process (step S160) for determining the performance mode when executing the variable display, which is displayed in the reserved storage display area 5U. A pending change performance determination process (step S161) that determines the display mode of the pending display and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F, and the gaming effect lamp 9 indicates that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled based on the occurrence of a starting prize. A winning flash effect process (step 162) for executing a flash effect at the time of entry that is continuously suggested by the light emission of the button vibration effect for executing a button vibration effect in which the push button 31B is driven by the vibration motor 36. processing (step S163), appearance animation processing (step S164) for displaying the pending display in the pending memory display area 5U, and displaying the pending display in the pending memory display area 5U and the active display in the active display area 5F. Retention animation processing (step S165), for moving (shifting) the pending display displayed in the pending storage display area 5U toward the previous display position on the pending storage display area 5U or the active display area 5F. Shift animation processing (step S166), termination animation processing (step S167) for ending the display of the active display in the active display area 5F, and the LED constituting the first sub-hold display 151A and the second sub-hold display 151B. A sub-pending indicator lighting control process (step S168) is executed to control lighting based on the number of pending memories. The sub-holding display lighting control process is also a process of updating the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the second special figure pending memory in the display area 5S, which will be described later. After the end animation process is executed, one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. In addition, in the variable display performance processing in this embodiment, lighting control of the LEDs constituting the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B is also executed. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed. In addition, the process of step 172 in this embodiment also performs the process for executing variable display of small symbols in the display area 5S, which will be described later.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Production mode)
As shown in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, performance modes A to D are provided, and performance mode A and performance mode B are performance modes that can be selected when the gaming state is the normal state, Performance mode C is a performance mode selected when the gaming state is a time saving state, and performance mode D is a performance mode selected when the gaming state is a variable probability state.

In the production mode determination process, when the gaming state is the normal state, the production mode is set to production mode A at the start timing of the first variable display in the normal state. In addition, at the second and subsequent variable display start timings in the normal state, if the set production mode is production mode A, the production mode is set to production mode B by lottery, and the set production mode is set to production mode A. If it is mode B, the production mode is set to production mode A by lottery.

In addition, in the performance mode determination process, when the jackpot game state ends, the performance mode is set to performance mode C based on the reception of the game state designation command indicating the time saving state from the CPU 103, and the probability change state is set from the CPU 103. The production mode is set to production mode D based on the reception of the game state designation command shown in FIG.

Although the details will be described later, in the production mode A to production mode D in this embodiment, the background image displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display mode of decorative patterns, the display mode of active display and pending display, etc. Each one is different.

(Pending change effect determination process)
FIG. 46 shows the determination ratio of the display mode of the pending display and active display in the pending change effect determination process shown in FIG. 44. In the pending change performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 22(B) and identifies the presence or absence of an entry for which the pending display flag is not set. If there is an entry for which the pending display flag is not set, specify the variable display result from the symbol designation command in that entry and the deviation effect from the deviation effect pattern command in this entry, and specify the deviation effect from these specified variable display results. Based on this, whether or not to execute the pending change effect and the effect pattern, that is, the display mode of the pending display and the active display are determined.

For example, as shown in FIG. 46, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 5% not to execute the pending change effect, and at a rate of 25% it is determined to execute the pending change effect in performance pattern A. Then, at a rate of 70%, execution of the performance pattern B of the pending change performance is determined. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the off performance pattern is non-reach, 95% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending change performance, and 5% of the time it is decided to execute the pending change performance with performance pattern A. It is determined that the performance pattern B of the pending change performance is to be executed at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the off performance pattern is normal reach, 75% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending change performance, and 20% of the time it is decided to execute the pending change performance with performance pattern A. Then, the performance pattern B of the pending change performance is decided to be executed at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the off performance pattern is super reach, 65% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending change performance, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the pending change performance with performance pattern A. It is determined that the performance pattern B of the pending change performance is to be executed at a rate of 10%.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag of the entry as " 0", and if it has been decided to execute the pending display notice performance in performance pattern A, set "1" as the value of the pending display flag of the entry, and execute in the performance pattern B of the pending display notice performance. If execution has been determined, "2" is set as the value of the pending display flag of the entry.

In addition, in the pending change performance determination process in the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the pending change performance and the determination ratio of the performance pattern of the pending change performance may be changed depending on the symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot. Although the present invention is not limited to this, if the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type may be variable jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable variable jackpot C, or non-probable variable jackpot. The execution or non-execution of the pending change performance and the determination ratio of the performance pattern of the pending change performance may be changed depending on whether the jackpot is reached, or the determination ratio of the performance pattern of the pending change performance may be changed depending on whether or not the probability variable state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game. The determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pending change performance and the performance pattern of the pending change performance may be varied. By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to whether or not the pending change performance will be executed and in which performance pattern the pending change performance will be executed.

In the present embodiment, after setting a value of 0 to 2 in the pending display flag corresponding to each entry in the starting winning reception command buffer 001SG194A as described above, the performance control CPU 120 performs the appearance animation process (step S164), retention animation processing (step 165), and shift animation processing (step S166), if the value of the hold display flag is set to 0, the hold display or hold display according to the hold display flag is set. If the active display is displayed in white and has a shape that corresponds to the production mode, and the value of the pending display flag is set to 1, the pending display or active display that corresponds to the pending display flag will have a shape that corresponds to the production mode. In addition, it is displayed in blue, and when "2" is set as the value of the hold display flag, the hold display and active display corresponding to the hold display flag are displayed in red and in a shape corresponding to the production mode.

With these settings, when the pending display and active display are displayed in blue in display pattern A or red in display pattern B, the control is controlled to a jackpot gaming state more than when the pending display and active display are displayed in white. When the percentage of winnings (expectation of jackpot) increases, and when the pending display and active display are displayed in red in display pattern B, compared to when the pending display and active display are displayed in blue in display pattern A. Since the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation level) increases, players should pay attention to the display mode of these pending displays and active displays, that is, whether or not pending change effects are executed and the performance pattern. can be done.

(Flash effect processing when winning a prize)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the winning flash effect process shown in FIG. 44. In the winning flash performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the starting winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. Determination is made (step 001SGS301). If there is a pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301; N), it is further determined whether there is a pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is already set to "1", that is, It is determined whether a winning flash effect has already been executed for other reserved memories (step 001SGS302).

If there is no pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1", the winning flash is generated from the symbol designation command and the losing effect pattern command stored as pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set. It is determined whether or not to perform the performance (step 001SGS303).

For example, as shown in FIG. 48, if the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 60%. do. In addition, if the symbol designation command is missed and the missed effect pattern command is non-reach, the non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 0%. . Further, when the symbol designation command is missed and the missed performance pattern command is normal reach, non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 100%, and execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 0%. Additionally, if the symbol designation command is missed and the missed effect pattern command is Super Reach, the non-execution of the flash effect upon winning will be determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of the flash effect upon winning will be determined at a rate of 20%. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (step 001SGS304). When it is decided to execute the winning flash effect (step 001SGS304; Y), the winning flash effect flag in the pending memory is set to "1" and the process proceeds to step 007SGS307 (step 001SGS305), in which the winning flash effect is disabled. When it is determined to execute (step 001SGS304; N), "0" is set as the winning flash effect flag in the pending memory and the process proceeds to step 001SGS307 (step 001SGS306).

If there is no pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301; N) or after the processing of steps 001SGS305 and 001SGS306 is executed, the starting winning receiving command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 22(B) is , it is determined whether or not there is a pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is "1" (step 001SGS307). If there is a pending memory with the winning flash effect flag set to "1" (step 001SGS307; Y), whether or not the winning flash effect flag is being displayed variably according to the pending memory set to "1"; In other words, it is determined whether or not the pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" is stored in the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the starting winning receiving command buffer 001SG194A. (Step 001SGS308). If the winning flash effect flag is not being displayed in a variable manner according to the hold memory set to "1" (step 001SGS308; N), the process advances to step 001SGS310, and the hold memory for which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" is not in progress (step 001SGS308; N). If the variable display is in progress according to the memory (step 001SGS308; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display is at a timing before the reach by referring to the process table of the variable display being executed. (Step 001SGS309). If the variable display is at a timing before the reach (step 001SGS309; Y), the process proceeds to step 001SGS310.

Then, in the process of step 001SGS310, the blinking control of the game effect lamp 9 is executed in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the winning flash effect process is ended (step 00SGS310). In addition, if there is no pending memory of the winning flash effect flag being "1" (step 001SGS307; N) or if the variable display is at a timing after reach (step 001SGS309; N), the process of step 001SGS310 is executed. The flash effect processing when winning a prize ends without doing so.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the occurrence of a starting prize, the gaming effect lamp 9 is made to emit light as a flash effect at the time of winning, thereby suggesting that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but a plurality of light emission patterns and light emission colors of the game effect lamp 9 are provided as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a jackpot game state is determined according to the light emission pattern and light emission color of these game effect lamps 9. The ratio (jackpot expectation level) that is controlled may be made to be different.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a mode in which the game effect lamp 9 emits light as a flash effect at the time of winning is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lamp different from the game effect lamp 9 (e.g. , a lamp dedicated to the winning flash effect) may be provided, and a lamp different from the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light for the winning flash effect.

(Button vibration effect processing)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the button vibration effect processing shown in FIG. 44. In the button vibration performance, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a button vibration performance execution flag indicating that the button vibration performance is being executed is set (step 001SGS321). If the button vibration performance execution flag is not set (step 001SGS321; N), it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 001SGS322). If the gaming state is the normal state (step 001SGS322; Y), it is further determined whether or not a first starting slot winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS323). If the first starting opening winning designation command has not been received (step 001SGS323; N), the button vibration production process is finished, and if the first starting opening winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS323; Y), the 22(B), the first special figure pending storage number is specified with reference to the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A (step 001SGS324).

On the other hand, when the gaming state is not the normal state (step 001SGS322; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state (step 001SGS325). If the gaming state is neither a time saving state nor a variable probability state, that is, if the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state (step 001SGS325; N), the button vibration production process is ended, and if the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (Step 001SGS325; Y) further determines whether or not a second starting opening winning designation command has been received (Step 001SGS326). If the second starting opening winning designation command has not been received (step 001SGS326; N), the button vibration production process is finished, and if the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS326; Y), the 22(B), the second special figure pending storage number is specified with reference to the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A (step 001SGS327).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the number of pending memories specified in step 001SGS324 or step 001SGS327 is three or more (step 001SGS328). That is, in step 001SGS328, if the gaming state is the normal state, it is determined whether the first special symbol pending memory number is 3 or more, and if the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the second special symbol is determined. It is determined whether the number of stored figures is 3 or more. If the specified number of pending memories is 2 or less (Step 001SGS328; N), the button vibration effect processing is ended, and if the specified number of pending memories is 3 or more (Step 001SGS328; Y), the button vibration effect is executed. The execution flag is set (step 001SGS39), a button vibration effect execution timer is set, and the button vibration effect processing is ended (step 001SGS330).

Then, when the button vibration effect execution flag is set (step 001SGS321; Y), the effect control CPU 120 drives the vibration motor 36 by executing the vibration motor control process (step 001SGS331). The push button 31B is vibrated by driving the vibration motor 36, and the value of the button vibration performance execution timer is decreased by 1 (step 001SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the button vibration performance execution timer has timed out ( Step 001SGS333). If the button vibration effect execution timer has not timed out (step 001SGS323; N), the button vibration effect processing is finished, and if the button vibration effect execution timer has timed out (step 001SGS323; Y), the button vibration effect is being executed. The flag is cleared and the button vibration effect processing is ended (step 001SGS334). In other words, the button vibration effect in this embodiment is performed for a predetermined period when the number of first special symbols held in memory is 3 in the normal state, and when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 3 in the time saving state or variable probability state. This is an effect for notifying that the number of pending memories approaches the upper limit of four by vibrating the push button 31B for (for example, 5 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, a button vibration effect is executed based on the number of second special symbols pending storage being three or more, and the second special symbol is displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and in a time saving state or a variable probability state, game balls frequently start winning. Since this is a gaming state in which winnings are won, the button vibration effect may not be executed in these time-saving states and in variable probability states.

(Sub hold display lighting control process)
FIG. 50 shows the first sub-pending display 151A and the second sub-pending display for each situation in which the performance control CPU 120 receives the start winning designation command in the sub-pending display lighting control process (step S168) shown in FIG. 151B is a diagram showing a lighting control mode of 151B. In the sub-pending display lighting control process, whether or not to light up the LEDs constituting the first sub-pending display 151A and the second sub-pending display 151B is varied depending on the received starting winning designation command and the number of pending memories. ing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 50(A), when the number of second special symbols pending is 0 when the first starting opening winning designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 sets the production process flag value to 0. If this is the case, that is, the variable display of decorative symbols is not executed in a state that is not a jackpot game state, and the pending memory does not exist other than the first special symbol pending memory based on the winning of the new first starting prize opening. In this case, since the variable display of decorative symbols based on the first special symbol reservation memory is immediately executed, control is performed to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of first special symbol reservation memories in the first sub reservation display 151A. (Control for lighting only one LED of the first sub-hold display 151A) is not executed. On the other hand, if the performance process flag value is 0 and the number of first special figure pending memories is 2 to 4, that is, the variable display is not executed in a state that is not a jackpot game state, but the first special figure pending memory is a new start. If there is a reserved memory other than the one based on winning, or if the production process flag value is one of 1 to 7, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 1 to 4, that is, regardless of the number of reserved memories. During the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols including the execution of the variable display start setting process or during the jackpot game, control is performed to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of first special symbol reservations stored in the first sub-reservation display 151A. Execute.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 50(B), when the number of second special symbols pending when the first starting opening winning designation command is received is one or more, that is, the game is newly entered into the first starting winning opening. When the ball wins and the second special symbol pending storage number is one or more, the production control CPU 120 determines that the next variable display of the decorative symbol is based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, regardless of the performance process flag value or the first special figure pending memory number, control is executed to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the first special figure pending memory number in the first sub-suspension display 151A.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20(C), when the second starting opening winning designation command is received, that is, regardless of the number of reserved first special drawings, the game ball newly enters the second starting winning opening. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 sets the performance process flag value to 0, the second special figure pending memory number to 1, that is, the variable display is not executed in a state where the jackpot game is not in progress, and the second special figure is pending. If there is no memory other than the reserved memory based on a new starting winning, the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the second special symbol reserved memory is immediately executed, so the second special symbol is displayed on the second sub-reserved display 151B. Control to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of pending memories (control to light only one LED of the second pending display 25B) is not executed. On the other hand, if the production process flag value is 0 and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 to 4, that is, the variable display is not executed in a state that is not a jackpot game state, but the second special figure pending memory is a new start. If there is a reserved memory other than the one based on winning, or if the production process flag value is one of 1 to 7, and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 to 4, that is, regardless of the number of reserved memories. During execution of variable display of decorative symbols, including execution of variable display start setting process, and jackpot game, control is performed to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of second special symbol reservations stored in the second sub-reservation display 151B. Execute.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS341). If the first variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS341; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 001SGS342). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start designation reception flag is off in step 001SGS341 (step 001SGS341; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS343). If the second variable display start designation reception flag is off (step 001SGS343; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS343; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 001SG194A are stored in one buffer number. Shift upward by minutes (step 001SGS344). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 001SGS342 or step 001SGS344, the production control CPU 120 reads out the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 001SGS345).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 001SGS346). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 001SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the production control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as the stop symbols "7". ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, "7" is displayed as the stop symbol. It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, depending on the fluctuation pattern, a combination in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, a combination such as "767", etc. Determine the combination (missing symbol) that will result in the out-of-reach.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

After executing step 001SGS346, the production control CPU 120 selects the production control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern specification command (step 001SGS347), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table ( Step 001SGS348).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 001SGS349). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command; however, the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 001SGS350). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 001SGS351). In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative pattern at the center left to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172) (step 001SGS352).

(Period related to processing by CPU 103 and production control CPU 120)
Here, a period related to processing executed by CPU 103 and production control CPU 120 (and display control unit 123) in this embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 52(A), the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 24 every 4 ms. That is, the CPU 103 in this embodiment determines whether or not a starting prize has occurred every 4 ms, and executes special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, etc. In addition, the CPU 103 sets 500 ms after the variable display of the special symbol as a symbol confirmation period, and a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. Furthermore, the CPU 103 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs constituting the special symbol at intervals of 40ms, with one period of 320ms, in addition to the periodic 12ms turn-off state and 4ms turn-on state in the display control process (step S43). Execute (see FIG. 18(A)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52(A), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process shown in FIG. 26 every 2 ms. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment determines which command has been received from the CPU 103 every 2 ms (command analysis process), the performance control process process, the performance random number update process, the demonstration performance control process, Executes background display update processing, etc. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch between lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs constituting the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B at intervals of 240ms, with one period of 480ms (FIG. 18). See B).

Furthermore, the display control unit 123 in this embodiment requires a period of 33 ms (image drawing period) to draw an image, and updates the image displayed on the image display device 5 to a new image. The cycle (image update cycle) is 33 ms. That is, in this embodiment, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is updated approximately 30 times per second (30 FPS).

(Production mode details)
Next, production mode A to production mode D will be explained. As mentioned above, performance mode A and performance mode B are performance modes that can be set when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), and performance mode C is the performance mode that can be set when the gaming state is the time saving state (low probability low base state). The production mode D is a performance mode that is set when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state). In each production mode in this embodiment, the display mode of the pending display and active display displayed on the image display device 5, the execution period of various animations, and whether or not they are executed are different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the appearance animation of the pending display is executed for 660ms (20 frames) in production mode A and production mode B, and is executed for 165ms (5 frames) in production mode C. In production mode D, the process is executed for 99ms (3 frames). Note that the appearance animation of these pending displays may be shortened as described later.

In addition, the retention animation of the pending display and active display is repeatedly executed with one period of 2970ms (90 frames) in production mode A and production mode B, but is not executed in production mode C and production mode D. ing.

The ending animation of the active display is commonly executed in 165 ms (5 frames) in presentation mode A to presentation mode D.

(Display mode of each production mode)
As shown in FIG. 53 (A1), in production mode A, decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative pattern represents a daytime city scene. The first background image 001SG081 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 53 (A2), the variable display of decorative patterns is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line from the top to the bottom. executed.

Specifically, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line until it moves to the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and The frame is displayed downward from the bottom of 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". " is displayed repeatedly. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the number of reserved special symbols, the number of stored second special symbols, and small symbols. In the suspended storage display area 5U and active display area 5F, a suspended display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed are displayed. These pending and active displays are indicated by letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, and "L" for the third pending display). ", and in the fourth pending display, it is displayed as a cube containing "II (Roman numeral 2)") (see FIG. 67(A)).

In this embodiment, each time a new pending memory occurs, the characters displayed in the new pending display always change regularly in the order of P→W→F→L→II→P→W... It looks like this. For example, if the number of pending memories is 0 and four new pending memories occur in succession during variable display of special symbols, if the character in the active display is "P", 1 in the pending memory display area 5U. The letter for the first hold display is "W," the letter for the second hold display is "F," the letter for the third hold display is "L," and the letter for the fourth hold display is "II." becomes. Also, in this situation, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the variable display of a new special symbol ends, the pending display containing the letter "W" is shifted to the active display area 5F as the active display, and the pending memory display is In area 5U, the hold display containing the letter "F" shifts to the display position of the first hold display, and the hold display containing the letter "L" shifts to the display position of the second hold display. Then, the hold display including the characters "II" is shifted to the display position of the third hold display. Furthermore, if a new pending memory (fourth pending memory) is generated in this state, a pending display containing the letter "P" will be displayed at the display position of the fourth pending display in the pending memory display area 5U. Is displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the characters "P", "W", "F", "L", and "II" are displayed in the active display and the pending display in the order in which pending storage occurs. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, for example, if there is one or more suspended memory when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage state, the active memory immediately before the power outage occurs. The sequence of characters in the display or pending display (for example, "F", "L", "II", "P", "W" or "II", "P", "W", "F", "L") ''), the characters in the active display or pending display may be displayed in a predetermined order (for example, "P", "W", "F", "L", "II"). In addition, these 1st special figure pending memory number, 2nd special figure pending memory number, small design, pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, so they will be explained below. omitted.

As shown in FIG. 53 (B1), in production mode B, decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative pattern represents the landscape of the wilderness at daytime. The second background image 001SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 53 (B2), the variable display of decorative patterns is achieved by a scroll display (second scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back side to the front side. A variable display is executed.

Specifically, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a frame so as to approach the center of the screen from the top of the left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the top of the right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and then moved downward. It moves away from the left and right sides of the screen and is displayed frame-out laterally from the lower left side of the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative symbol display area 5R. The inner decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the inner decorative pattern display area 5C, and then displayed in a frame-out manner.

Further, the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the decorative pattern "2") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center position of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. Sometimes, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in a frame and moves toward the center of the screen. In other words, when the preceding "2" decorative pattern is passing near the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "3" decorative pattern are visible, but the preceding "2" decorative pattern is visible. After the decorative pattern passes the stop position, the subsequent "3" decorative pattern and "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly displayed. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, in the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. Display is displayed. These pending and active displays are indicated by letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, and "L" for the third pending display). ", and in the fourth pending display, "II") is displayed as a regular octahedron (see FIG. 67(A)).

As shown in FIG. 53 (C1), in production mode C, decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative pattern represents the evening cityscape. The third background image 001SG083 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 53 (C2), the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotating display that rotates around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. Ru.

Specifically, the decorative pattern in production mode C has a first side and a second side which is the opposite side to the first side, and the first side has a preceding decorative pattern (for example, "3"). Decorative designs) are displayed. On the other hand, when the first side faces forward, it is not possible to specify whether a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second side.

In addition, the decorative pattern can be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and by rotating in the order of the first surface, second surface, first surface, second surface, etc. , the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and the updated display from "0" to "9" is displayed. repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the rotating display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, when the second side is displayed after being rotated approximately 90 degrees or more from the state where the first side is facing forward, the decorative pattern displayed on the first side (for example, "3") is displayed on the second side. A subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern of "4") is displayed. Next, although not particularly illustrated, when the first surface is displayed by rotating approximately 90 degrees or more from the state in which the second surface 5b is facing forward, the first surface displays the information displayed on the second surface 5b. A decorative pattern (for example, a "5" decorative pattern) subsequent to the decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed.

In addition, a right-handed hitting notification image 001SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations. In the lower left part, time saving remaining display 001SG202 (in this example, characters "remaining XX times", XX=0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control will be executed is displayed.

Furthermore, in the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. Display is displayed. These pending and active displays are indicated by letters (for example, "P" for active display, "W" for first pending display, "F" for second pending display, and "L" for third pending display). ", and "II" in the fourth pending display)) (see FIG. 67(A)).

As shown in FIG. 53 (D1), in production mode D, decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative pattern represents the scenery of the night city. A fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 53 (D2), the variable display of decorative patterns is achieved by a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R linearly from the top to the bottom. A variable display is executed.

Specifically, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line. The frame is displayed downward from the bottom of 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing through the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative designs increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", they return to "0", and from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly increased. That is, the scroll display of the decorative patterns is executed by displaying the decorative patterns "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations.

Furthermore, in the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. Display is displayed. These pending displays and active displays are the same as in production mode C (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "F" for the third pending display, etc.). While it is displayed as a sphere containing the letter "L" in the pending display and "II" in the fourth pending display, the difference is that the color scheme inside these spheres and the color scheme of the letters contained are reversed. (See Figure 67(A)).

(appearance animation)
Next, the appearance animation of the hold display in each production mode will be explained. In this embodiment, "animation" refers to, for example, a dynamic display that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the previous image (one frame). It may be a video display) in which the visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image different from the previous image. In other words, "animation" includes not only display that involves image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarging display", "reducing display", "frame-in display" and "frame-out display", but also "fade-out display". It also includes displays such as "display" and "fade-in display" that do not involve displacement of the image but change the display mode such as color tone.

In this embodiment, the "appearance animation" means that when a new pending memory is generated due to a game ball entering the starting winning hole, the pending memory is placed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. This is an animation for displaying a pending display in response to the occurrence of. As shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 67(B), when a starting winning occurs in production mode A and execution of the pending change performance is not determined based on the starting winning, that is, the pending display is displayed in white. In this case, based on the occurrence of the starting winning, a new pending display moves from a lower position on the front side of the pending storage display area 5U to an upper position of the pending storage display area 5U. When the hold display reaches the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U, it descends toward the position corresponding to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U, and finally reaches the position above the hold memory display area 5U. It is displayed in a position according to the number of pending memories. In other words, if a starting winning occurs in performance mode A and execution of the pending change performance is not determined based on the starting winning, the pending display will draw a parabola from the lower position on the near side of the pending storage display area 5U. Move to.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 56, the pending display moves in a parabolic manner with the apex above the active display or pending display that is already displayed, so the appearance of the white pending display in presentation mode A. The animation is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the staying animation of active display or pending display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 56, in the appearance animation when a starting winning occurs in production mode A and execution of the pending change effect is not determined based on the starting winning, the pending display is displayed in the first frame image. It is displayed with high transparency (for example, the transparency of the pending display in the first frame image is 90%), and as the appearance animation progresses, the transparency of the pending display gradually increases to 80%, 60%, and 40%. %, etc. In the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation, the transparency becomes 0% as the final mode of the pending display, and the display is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U.

As shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 67(B), when a starting winning occurs in presentation mode A and execution of a pending change effect is decided based on the starting winning, that is, the pending display is displayed in blue or red. If so, an effect is displayed at an upper position of the pending storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of the starting winning, and the effect descends toward the pending storage display area 5U. At this time, while the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, a blue or red pending display gradually decreases transparency and moves toward the pending memory display area 5U instead of the effect. and descends. In other words, the effect and the pending display move down together toward the pending storage display area 5U. Then, at the timing when the effect completely disappears, a pending display is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U.

In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display when it is decided to execute the pending change production in the production mode A starts displaying the pending display in a larger size than the active display or pending display that is already displayed, and It is also an animation that gradually reduces the size of the pending display as the display moves (descends).

Although not particularly shown, the blue and red pending displays and effects in production mode A start displaying from a position above the active display and pending display that are already displayed, and move toward the pending memory display area 5U. (descending), the appearance animation of the blue or red pending display in production mode A is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the staying animation of the active display or the pending display.

As shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 67(B), when a starting winning occurs in production mode B and it is decided not to execute the pending change effect based on the starting winning, that is, the pending display is displayed in white. In this case, an effect is displayed at an upper position of the pending storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of the starting winning, and the effect descends toward the pending storage display area 5U. At this time, while the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, a white pending display gradually decreases in transparency in place of the effect and descends toward the pending memory display area 5U. I will do it. In other words, the effect and the pending display move down together toward the pending storage display area 5U. Note that the effect in this appearance animation disappears five frames after the start of the animation, but the hold display continues to descend even after the effect disappears. Then, when a predetermined period of time (15 frames in the case of the animation) has elapsed since the effect disappears, a pending display is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U.

Although not particularly shown, the white pending display and effects in production mode B start displaying from a position above the active display and pending display that are already displayed, and move (descend) toward the pending memory display area 5U. ) and move, the appearance animation of the white pending display in production mode B is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the stay animation of the active display and the pending display.

As shown in FIG. 59 and FIG. 67(B), when a starting winning occurs in production mode B and it is decided to execute a pending change effect based on the starting winning, that is, the pending display is displayed in blue or red. In this case, the effect is displayed at the upper position of the pending storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of the start winning, and the effect is suspended, as in the case where execution of the pending change production is decided in production mode A. It descends toward the memory display area 5U. At this time, while the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, a blue or red pending display gradually decreases transparency and moves toward the pending memory display area 5U instead of the effect. and descends. In other words, the effect and the pending display move down together toward the pending storage display area 5U. Then, at the timing when the effect completely disappears, a pending display is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U.

In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display when it is decided to execute the pending change production in the production mode B starts displaying the pending display in a larger size than the active display or pending display that is already displayed, and It is also an animation that gradually reduces the size of the pending display as the display moves (descends).

Although not particularly shown, the blue and red pending displays and effects in production mode A start displaying from a position above the active display and pending display that are already displayed, and move toward the pending memory display area 5U. (descending), the appearance animation of the blue or red pending display in production mode A is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the staying animation of the active display or the pending display.

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 59, when displaying a blue or red pending display in production mode A or production mode B (when executing a pending change production), the first frame image of the appearance animation is By displaying the effect at the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U, the player can understand that the hold display that will be displayed from now on is the hold display that is subject to the hold change effect, that is, compared to the case where a white hold display is displayed. It can also be recognized that the percentage of games that are controlled to a jackpot gaming state is high. Furthermore, until the 9th frame of the appearance animation, the transparency of the pending display is set to be high so that the player cannot recognize whether the pending display is blue or red. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the displayed color is blue or red, that is, how high the rate of control to the jackpot gaming state is.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 59, when displaying a blue or red pending display in production mode A and production mode B (when executing a pending change production), frames 1 to 19 are displayed as appearance animations. In other words, when displaying a blue pending display in production mode A, when displaying a red pending display in production mode A, when displaying a blue pending display in production mode B, A common effect is displayed in a total of four appearance animations when displaying a red pending display in production mode B. Therefore, when displaying the pending display in blue or red in production mode A or production mode B, it is possible to standardize the image data used for these appearance animations, which is necessary to execute the appearance animation. The amount of data can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 60, FIG. 61, and FIG. 67, when a new starting winning occurs in presentation mode C and presentation mode D, first, based on the starting winning, the number of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U is The effect will be displayed at the corresponding position. The effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as the appearance animation progresses. Then, at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, a pending display is displayed in an enlarged manner while reducing transparency instead of the effect. Then, when the effect disappears, the reduction in transparency and enlargement of the pending display also end.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, between the appearance animation in production mode C and the appearance animation in production mode D, the appearance animation in production mode C takes more time from the start of display to the disappearance of the effect. The period is set to be long, and the period required from the start of display of the hold display to the end of enlargement is set to be long.

(staying animation)
Next, the retention animation of the hold display and active display in each production mode will be explained. The "stay animation" in this embodiment operates the active display in the active display area 5F during variable display of special symbols in a manner according to the production mode (rotation for production mode A, rotation for production mode B, Animation that does not operate in C and D) and an animation that operates the pending display in the pending memory display area 5U in a manner according to the production mode (rotation in production mode A, rotation in production mode B) when there is one or more pending memories. This is an animation that includes an animation that is made to move, and an animation that does not operate in production modes C and D.

As shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 67(B), the staying animation in production mode A is an animation in which the hold display and the active display are rotated clockwise around the vertical axis when viewed from the front. The staying animation in the production mode A is repeatedly executed with one cycle being 90 frames. In addition, in the stay animation in the production mode A, the characters in the pending display or active display also rotate according to the rotation of the pending display or active display.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 62(B) and 67(B), the staying animation in production mode B rotates the hold display and active display clockwise and counterclockwise around the vertical axis when viewed from the front. This is an animation that rotates alternately. The retention animation in this production mode has one cycle of 90 frames, and in the first 45 frames, the hold display and active display are rotated counterclockwise around the vertical axis when viewed from the front, and in the latter 45 frames, the hold display and active display are rotated counterclockwise around the vertical axis. The active display can be rotated clockwise around a vertical axis when viewed from the front. Further, in the staying animation in the performance mode B, the characters in the pending display or active display also rotate according to the rotation of the pending display or active display.

In addition, the performance mode C and the performance mode D in this embodiment, that is, the time saving state and the variable probability state, are once compared to the normal state in which the hold display and the active display are displayed in the performance mode A and the performance mode B. Since the time required for the variable display of the area is set short, the retention animation of the pending display and active display is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suspended animation in production mode C and production mode D is also executed. A dwell animation of the display or active display may be performed.

Note that the stay animation in this embodiment is an animation that is displayed in one cycle at 90 frames (2970 ms), that is, at about 30 frames per second (frame rate is about 30 FPS). Here, since the stay animation is an animation that is viewed by the player for a longer period of time than the appearance animation and end animation, there is a desire to show the action of the hold display in a leisurely manner. Furthermore, by producing the appearance animation at a frame rate of approximately 30 FPS, there is an advantage that not only is it easier to develop the game machine, but also that it is easier for the developer to imagine the actual operation of the hold display. For the above reasons, the staying animation in this embodiment is produced as an animation with a frame rate of 30 FPS, but the present invention is not limited to this. It can also be used as a rate animation.

(End animation)
Next, the end animation of the active display in each production mode will be explained. The "end animation" in this embodiment terminates the display of the active display according to the variable display when the variable display of the special symbol ends (stops) (disappears the active display from the active display area 5F). It's an animation. As shown in FIG. 63(A) to FIG. 63(D) and FIG. 67(B), the end animation in each production mode is an animation executed in the active display area 5F, and the finished variable display This is an animation in which the transparency of the active display corresponding to , gradually increases, and completely disappears from the active display area 5F at the 5th frame.

Although the end animation of this embodiment is executed in a common manner in each production mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the end animation can be changed in each production mode. It is also possible to perform weekly rainfall animations that are common but have different aspects in each production mode.

(shift animation)
Next, the shift animation of the hold display in each production mode will be explained. "Shift animation" in this embodiment means that the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is activated in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol. The animation of moving toward the display area 5F and the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U are suspended in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol. An animation that moves the display area 5U toward the position corresponding to the first pending memory, and a new special animation that moves the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the third pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U. An animation that moves the symbol to the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U in response to the start of variable display of the symbol, and a movement to the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U. This animation includes an animation of moving the currently displayed pending display toward a position corresponding to the third pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 64, FIG. 66, and FIG. 67(B), the shift animation is an animation that is executed when the active display in the active display area 5F disappears (display ends) due to the end animation described above. The pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the memory display area 5U is displayed as the next active display in the active display area 5F, and the pending display is displayed at the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U. The hold display displayed in the hold memory display area 5U is in a position corresponding to the first hold memory, and the hold display displayed in the hold memory display area 5U is in a position corresponding to the third hold memory. The pending display displayed in the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U and the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is 3 in the pending memory display area 5U. A movement display (shift) is simultaneously executed to a position corresponding to the retained memory of the eyes.

As shown in FIG. 65, if a new pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0 and variable display is not being executed, first, the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is A pending display (a pending display in the final form of the appearance animation) is displayed at the corresponding position without executing the appearance animation. From this state, only movement display (shift) of the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F is executed as a shift animation.

As shown in FIG. 57, the positions corresponding to the first pending memory in the active display area 5F and the pending memory display area 5U are separated by a length L1. The position according to the second reserved memory, the position according to the second reserved memory, the position according to the second reserved memory, the position according to the third reserved memory, the position according to the third reserved memory, The corresponding position and the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory are separated by a length L2 (L1>L2), which is shorter than the length L1. Therefore, in the shift animation of this embodiment, the pending display that is shifted to the active display area 5F as an active display corresponding to the next variable display is shifted faster than other pending displays.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 64, 65, and 66, in this embodiment, shift animations in production mode A and production mode B have been explained, but shift animations in production mode C and production mode D are similar to production mode A. Since this is the same as the shift animation in production mode B, the explanation will be omitted. Furthermore, although FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram when the shift animation is executed in a state where the number of pending memories is one in production mode A, the same applies when the number of pending memories is one in production mode B. A shift animation is executed.

(About the display mode of the pending display when a new pending memory occurs)
Next, the display mode of the pending display when a new pending memory occurs due to the winning of a game ball to the starting winning hole will be explained for each situation. In addition, regarding the following forms, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), the number of second special symbols held is 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. We will explain whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol at the time, the number of first special symbols pending, and the pending display based on the number of first special symbols pending. This also applies to the execution or non-execution of variable display of the second special symbol, the number of second special symbol pending memories, and the pending display based on these second special symbol pending memory numbers when in a variable probability state.

(Shortened appearance animation details)
Next, shortening (hereinafter sometimes referred to as skipping) of the above-described appearance animation of the hold display will be explained. The following explanation will be mainly based on the appearance animation of effect pattern A, but since the appearance animations of effect patterns B to D differ only in the execution period, the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 68(A) and 68(B), when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, a new pending memory is generated, and based on the pending memory, non-execution of the pending change effect is determined. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 receives a pending storage number notification command based on the occurrence of the pending storage, and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the appearance animation. When the image drawing of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the display of a new pending display appearance animation is started on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

Here, as shown in FIG. 68(A), if the period from the start timing of the appearance animation to the start timing of the next variable display is 660 ms or more, the suspended display draws a parabola over 660 ms (20 frames). The images of all the frames moving towards the position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U are displayed, and finally the pending display moves to the position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U as the final mode. will be displayed. Then, when the next variable display starts, the effect control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start designation command), so that the first frame of the shift animation by the display control unit 123 is Image drawing begins. When the image drawing of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, display of the shift animation is started on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68(B), if the period from the start timing of the appearance animation to the start timing of the next variable display is less than 660ms, the part of the appearance animation that is still in progress at the next variable display start timing is The frame image (the 14th frame image in the diagram of FIG. 68(B)) is displayed. In addition, when the next variable display starts, the effect control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start designation command), so that the first frame of the shift animation by the display control unit 123 is Image drawing begins. When the image drawing of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the shift animation from the next image update timing in place of the appearance animation that has been executed up to that point.

At this time, the images that have not been displayed as the appearance animation (the 16th to 20th frame images in the diagram of FIG. 68(B)) are not displayed as they are, and the display of the shift animation is started. The hold display displayed as the first frame of the shift animation is the final form of the hold display displayed as the appearance animation (displayed as the 20th frame image at a position corresponding to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U). The image has the same appearance as the pending display). Therefore, when a new variable display is started while the appearance animation is being executed, the player may notice that the pending display, which had been displayed moving in a parabolic manner as the appearance animation up to that point, suddenly appears on hold in the pending memory display area 5U. It will be displayed at a position corresponding to the number of memories, and will be visually recognized as shifting to a shift animation.

In addition, in FIGS. 68(A) and 68(B), when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, a new pending memory is generated, and based on the pending memory, it is decided not to execute the pending change effect. As shown in FIGS. 69(A) and 69(B), a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, and a pending change effect is created based on the pending memory. 68(A) and 68(B), if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the variable display start designation command during the execution period of the appearance animation, the blue color While the appearance animation of the red pending display is executed for 660ms, during the execution period of the appearance animation, the blue or red pending display appears in response to the production control CPU 120 receiving a variable display start designation command. The animation is interrupted (skipped), and a blue or red pending display shift animation is started in place of the appearance animation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 70(A), when the number of pending memories is 0 and the symbol confirmation period of the variable display that has already ended is immediately before the end, that is, within 33ms of the end of the symbol confirmation period, a new When a suspended memory occurs (when the number of suspended memories is 0 and a new suspended memory occurs at the timing immediately before the next variable display), the performance control CPU 120 notifies the number of suspended memories based on the occurrence of the suspended memory. Upon receiving the command, the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the appearance animation. When the image drawing of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the display of a new pending display appearance animation is started on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 70(A), variable display based on a new suspended memory is started while the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is being drawn, so when the variable display is started, the effect When the control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start designation command), the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. When the image drawing of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, display of the shift animation is started on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

Therefore, in the image display device 5, when the image of the appearance animation of the first frame is displayed, the images of the second to 20th frames of the appearance animation are not displayed, but are displayed as the images of the shift animation. As an image in which the first hold display in area 5U (a hold display in the same manner as the hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation) shifts toward active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display. It will be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70(B), when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs immediately after the end of the variable display symbol confirmation period that has already ended, that is, the symbol confirmation period is When a new suspended memory is generated within 33 ms after the termination, a performance control CPU 120 receives a suspended memory number notification command or a variable display start command almost simultaneously based on the generation of the suspended memory. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 gives priority to drawing the shift animation image over the appearance animation image.

Therefore, in the image display device 5, the image of the appearance animation is not displayed, but the image of the first hold display (the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation) in the hold storage display area 5U is displayed as the image of the shift animation. The hold display (in the same manner as the hold display) will be displayed as an image shifting toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71, when the number of pending memories is 0 and sufficient time has passed since the end of the variable display symbol confirmation period that has already ended, that is, 33 ms after the end of the symbol confirmation period. If a new pending memory occurs at the timing that has elapsed above, the performance control CPU 120 receives a pending memory number notification command or a variable display start command almost simultaneously based on the generation of the pending memory. As a result, the display control unit 123 gives priority to drawing the shift animation image over the appearance animation image.

Therefore, in the image display device 5, the image of the appearance animation is not displayed, but the image of the first hold display (image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation) in the hold storage display area 5U is displayed as the image of the shift animation. The hold display (in the same manner as the hold display) will be displayed as an image shifting toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, when the number of pending memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new pending memory (N+1th pending memory) occurs just before the end of the variable display of the special symbol, The appearance animation of the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory is started at the position corresponding to N+1 pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. When the variable display of a new special symbol is started during the execution of the appearance animation, a movement display (shift animation) of the pending display according to the Nth pending memory is executed in the pending memory display area 5U. At this time, the appearance animation of the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory is still in progress, so the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory is moved and displayed while continuing the appearance animation (executing a shift animation). (hereinafter referred to as the first plan), and not moving and displaying the screen until the appearance animation is completed (hereinafter referred to as the second plan).

Here, in the first proposal, since the moving display and the appearance animation of the pending display according to the new pending memory proceed simultaneously, the moving display and the appearing animation of the pending display according to the new pending memory proceed simultaneously. There is a problem in that both of these items are difficult for players to see. In addition, in the second proposal, in the pending memory display area 5U, a situation occurs in which the pending display is not displayed between the pending display for which the moving display has already been completed and the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory, and a new If the pending memory is the fourth pending memory, the pending display does not start moving from the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U until the appearance animation is completed, so the player cannot request a new pending memory. Even though variable display of special symbols has started, it may be mistakenly recognized that the number of reserved symbols remains at the upper limit of four, and there is a risk that the player may temporarily stop playing the game.

For the above reasons, in the present invention, when a new pending memory occurs while the appearance animation of the pending display is being executed, the appearance animation is interrupted (skip), so that the shift animation and appearance animation of the pending display can be visually confirmed. This reduces the possibility that the player will misunderstand the number of reservations displayed in the reservation storage display area 5U while ensuring the accuracy of the game.

Below, the display mode of the image display device 5 according to the timing at which a new pending memory occurs, the lighting control of each pending display, and the transmission and reception of commands will be explained based on FIGS. 72 to 85. In addition, although FIGS. 72 to 85 illustrate a state in which the gaming state is a normal state, the number of second special symbols pending is 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the gaming state is a time saving state or In a definite variable state, a state where the number of first special symbols pending is 0 and variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, only the target special symbol for variable display is different, and the display mode of the image display device 5 and each pending display are different. The lighting control of the device and the sending and receiving of commands are the same and will therefore be omitted.

(When a new pending memory occurs during a variable display where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, and the appearance animation starts 660ms or more before the start of the next variable display)
First, as shown in FIG. 72, when the number of first special symbol pending memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new first special symbol pending memory occurs during variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 , performs lighting control of the first reservation display 25A according to the number of reservation memories including the new first special figure reservation memory. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the variable display and the 500 ms symbol confirmation period based on the variable display end, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and displays the first pending display 25A in accordance with the subtracted pending memory number. Executes lighting control. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command 2 ms at the longest after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special symbol pending memory number from the first special symbol pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending storage display area 5U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 72, if the appearance animation is started at a timing when there is a period of 660 ms or more until the start timing of the next variable display, the drawing of the image of the appearance animation and the appearance animation display period are the next. It ends before the start of the variable display of , and instead, the staying animation of the pending display displayed by drawing the image of the staying animation and the appearance animation starts.

When the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending memory number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 calculates the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command. Identification is performed, and lighting control of the first sub-reservation display 151A is performed in accordance with the identified first special figure reservation storage number. Further, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of a shift animation instead of an image of a staying animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

(When a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, and the appearance animation starts at a timing of less than 660ms until the next variable display starts)
Next, as shown in FIG. 73, when the number of first special symbol reservation memories is N (3≧N≧1), a new first special symbol reservation memory is generated, and until the next variable display starts. A case will be described in which the appearance animation starts at a timing of less than 660 ms.

For example, if a new first special symbol pending memory occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display where the number of first special symbol pending memories is N (3≧N≧1), the CPU 103 Lighting control of the first reservation display 25A is performed according to the number of reservation memories including special figure reservation memories. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A in accordance with the subtracted pending memory number. Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory.

Here, if the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received during the drawing period of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation, the first special figure The first special figure pending memory number is specified from the figure pending memory number notification command, and the lighting control of the first sub-hold display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of a shift animation instead of an image of an appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, a new variable display is started while the appearance animation is being executed, and a shift animation is started in place of the appearance animation, so that 33 ms has not passed since the new suspended memory occurred. By starting a new variable display during a period in which there is no appearance animation, the pending display as the final mode in the appearing animation is performed at a position corresponding to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U without executing the appearing animation. Display will start. Moreover, as the shift animation in this case, only the pending display excluding the newly started displaying of the pending display needs to be shifted.

Here, since the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command have been received during the display period of the appearance animation, the production control CPU 120 will display the first sub-pending display. At the same time, the display control unit 123 starts drawing a shift animation image. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the appearance animation of the pending display ends midway from the player's point of view, and the pending display suddenly appears in the pending storage display area 5U in the same manner as the final appearance animation. The screen is displayed and the shift animation is visually recognized as being executed.

(When a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation after the end of a variable display where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 and after the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in FIG. 74, during the shift animation when the first special symbol pending storage number is N (3≧N≧1) and after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol and after the start of the next variable display, A case where a new first special figure pending storage occurs will be explained.

First, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A in accordance with the subtracted pending memory number. Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

Then, when a new pending memory is generated during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories including the new first special symbol pending memory. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

Here, when the production control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command based on the generation of a new pending memory while the shift animation is being executed, the production control CPU 120 starts from the first special figure pending memory number notification command. The number of first special figure pending memories is specified, and the lighting control of the first sub-reserve display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number N of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started at a timing before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. In addition, as an appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a moving display of the pending display is performed over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed as the final mode according to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. will be displayed in the specified position.

(When a new pending memory occurs within 33ms after the start of the next variable display after the end of variable display where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3)
Next, as shown in FIG. 75, after the first special symbol pending storage number is N (3≧N≧1) and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, a new special symbol is displayed within 33ms after the start of the next variable display. 1 A case where special figure pending storage occurs will be explained.

First, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A in accordance with the subtracted pending memory number. Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

Then, when a new pending memory is generated during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories including the new first special symbol pending memory. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol pending memory number notification command based on the generation of a new pending memory, the first special symbol pending memory number notification command is The number is specified, and the lighting control of the first sub-pending display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending storage number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number N of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started at a timing before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. In addition, as an appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a moving display of the pending display is performed over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed as the final mode according to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. will be displayed in the specified position.

(When the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 and a new pending memory occurs at a timing of less than 33ms until the start of the next variable display after the end of variable display)
Next, as shown in FIG. 76, after the first special symbol pending storage number is N (3≧N≧1) and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, a new one is created at a timing of less than 33 ms until the start of the next variable display. A case where the first special figure pending storage occurs will be explained.

First, as shown in FIG. 76, when a new first special symbol pending memory occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display where the number of first special symbol pending memories is N (3≧N≧1), the CPU 103 , performs lighting control of the first reservation display 25A according to the number of reservation memories including the new first special figure reservation memory. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period ends in less than 33 ms from the generation of a new pending memory, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol pending memories, and displays the first pending display 25A in accordance with the number of pending memories after the subtraction. Executes lighting control. Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory.

Here, if the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received during the drawing period of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation, the first special figure The first special figure pending memory number is specified from the figure pending memory number notification command, and the lighting control of the first sub-hold display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of a shift animation instead of an image of an appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, by starting a new variable display within a period of less than 33 ms after the occurrence of a new pending memory, the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U is displayed without the appearance animation being executed. Display of the pending display as the final aspect of the appearance animation will start at a position corresponding to the number N. Moreover, as the shift animation in this case, only the pending display excluding the newly started displaying of the pending display needs to be shifted.

(If a new starting prize occurs while the number of pending memories is variable displaying 4)
Next, as shown in FIG. 77, a case will be described in which a new starting prize (winning into the first starting prize opening) occurs during a variable display in which the first special figure pending storage number is four.

As shown in FIG. 77, if a new start winning occurs while the number of 1st special figure pending memory is variable displaying 4 pieces, since the number of 1st special figure pending memory is already 4 pieces which is the maximum number. A new first special figure pending memory is not generated. Therefore, when the variable display and symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and displays the first pending display 25A according to the subtracted pending memory number (3 pieces). Executes lighting control. Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number (3 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

(If a new pending memory occurs during the shift animation of the next variable display after the number of pending memories is 4 variable displays)
Next, as shown in FIG. 78, after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol whose number of first special symbol reservations is 4, a new first special symbol is reserved during the shift animation after the start of the next variable display. A case in which memory occurs will be explained.

First, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol pending memories, and controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories after the subtraction (3 pieces). . Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

Then, when a new pending memory is generated during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories including the new first special symbol pending memory. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number (3 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

Here, when the production control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command based on the generation of a new pending memory while the shift animation is being executed, the production control CPU 120 starts from the first special figure pending memory number notification command. The number of first special figure pending memories is specified, and the lighting control of the first sub-reserve display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending memory number (4 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories (4) in the pending storage display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started at a timing before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. In addition, as an appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a moving display of the pending display is performed over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed as the final mode according to the number of pending memories (4) in the pending memory display area 5U. will be displayed in the specified position.

(If a new starting prize occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the variable display with the number of pending memories of 4)
Next, as shown in FIG. 79, a case will be explained in which a new starting prize (winning into the first starting prize opening) occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the variable display of the first special figure pending storage number of four pieces. .

As shown in FIG. 79, during the pattern confirmation period after the variable display of the first special symbol pending memory number of four, the state where the first special symbol pending memory number is four is maintained. In addition, since the upper limit for the number of 1st special figure reservations is 4, even if a new starting prize (winning into the 1st starting prize opening) occurs during the symbol confirmation period, a new 1st special figure reservation will be held. No memory occurs. Therefore, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol pending memories and executes lighting control of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories after the subtraction (3 pieces). do. Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number (3 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

(If a new pending memory occurs within 33ms of the start of the next variable display after the number of pending memories is 4)
Next, as shown in FIG. 80, after the end of the variable display in which the first special figure pending memory number is 4, a new first special figure pending memory occurs within 33 ms after the start of the next variable display. .

First, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol pending memories, and controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories after the subtraction (3 pieces). . Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

Then, when a new pending memory occurs during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories (4 pieces) including the new first special figure pending memory. conduct. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number (3 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol pending memory number notification command based on the generation of a new pending memory, the first special symbol pending memory number notification command is The number is specified, and the lighting control of the first sub-pending display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending storage number (4 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories (4) in the pending memory display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started at a timing before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. In addition, as an appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a moving display of the pending display is performed over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed as the final mode according to the number of pending memories (4) in the pending memory display area 5U. will be displayed in the specified position.

(When a new pending memory occurs during a variable display where the number of pending memories is 0, and the appearance animation starts 660ms or more before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in FIG. 81, a new pending memory occurs during a variable display where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0, and the appearance animation starts at a timing of 660 ms or more before the start of the next variable display. A case in which it is started will be explained.
First, as shown in FIG. 81, when a new first special figure pending memory occurs while the number of first special figure pending memories is variable and displayed, the CPU 103 updates the pending memory including the new first special figure pending memory. The lighting control of the first hold indicator 25A is performed according to the number (one). In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the variable display and the 500 ms symbol confirmation period based on the variable display end, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and sets the first special symbol pending memory number (0) according to the subtracted pending memory number. The lighting control of the hold display 25A is executed. Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory (one).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories of 1 in the pending storage display area 5U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 81, if the appearance animation is started at a timing when there is a period of 660 ms or more until the start timing of the next variable display, the drawing of the image of the appearance animation and the appearance animation display period are the next. It ends before the start of the variable display of , and instead, the staying animation of the pending display displayed by drawing the image of the staying animation and the appearance animation starts.

When the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending memory number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 calculates the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command. Identification is performed, and lighting control of the first sub-retention display 151A is performed in accordance with the identified first special figure reservation memory number (0 pieces). Further, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of a shift animation instead of an image of a staying animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

(When a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 0, and the appearance animation starts at a timing of less than 660ms until the next variable display starts)
Next, as shown in FIG. 82, when the first special figure pending memory number is 0, a new first special figure pending memory is generated, and the appearance animation starts from a timing of less than 660 ms until the start of the next variable display. The following describes the case in which this is started.

For example, if a new first special figure pending memory occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0, the CPU 103 Lighting control of the first hold indicator 25A is performed according to the number of memories (one). In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and executes lighting control of the first pending display 25A according to the pending memory number (0 pieces) after the subtraction. . Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory (one).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory.

Here, since the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure reservation memory number notification command have been received during the display period of the appearance animation, the first special figure reservation by the production control CPU 120 The lighting control of the first sub-hold display 151A according to the storage number (0 pieces) is executed, and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the appearance animation of the pending display ends midway from the player's point of view, and the pending display suddenly appears in the pending storage display area 5U in the same manner as the final appearance animation. The screen is displayed and the shift animation is visually recognized as being executed.

(If a new pending memory occurs less than 33ms after the end of the symbol confirmation period for a variable display where the number of pending memories is 0)
Next, as shown in FIG. 83, regarding the case where a new first special figure pending memory occurs less than 33 ms after the end of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the first special symbol in which the number of first special figure pending memories is 0. explain.

First, when a new first special symbol pending memory occurs at a timing of less than 33 ms after the symbol confirmation period, the CPU 103 displays the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories including the new first special symbol pending memory. Without executing the lighting control, after adding 1 to the number of 1st special symbols pending, subtracting 1 from the number of 1st special symbols pending, and starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol). Then, based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first special symbol pending storage number notification command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

When the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 controls the lighting of the first sub pending display 151A according to the first special figure pending storage number. By controlling the display control unit 123 without executing it, the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, the movement display (appearance animation) of the pending display toward the position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U is not executed, and Display of a pending display as the final aspect of the appearance animation is started at a position corresponding to the first appearance animation. Then, the pending display is moved (shifted) toward the active display area 5F immediately after the display starts.

(If a new pending memory occurs within less than 33ms until the end of the symbol confirmation period for a variable display where the number of pending memories is 0)
Next, as shown in FIG. 84, regarding the case where a new first special figure pending memory occurs in less than 33 ms until the end of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the first special symbol where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0. explain.

First, as shown in FIG. 84, when a new first special figure pending memory occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0, the CPU 103 stores the new first special figure. Lighting control of the first reservation indicator 25A is performed according to the number of reservation memories (one) including the figure reservation memory. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period ends in less than 33ms from the generation of a new pending memory, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol pending memories, and selects the The lighting control of the hold display 25A is executed. Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory (one).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory.

Here, if the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received during the drawing period of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation, the first special figure The first special figure pending memory number is specified from the figure pending memory number notification command, and the lighting control of the first sub-hold display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of a shift animation instead of an image of an appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, by starting a new variable display within a period of less than 33 ms after the occurrence of a new pending memory, the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U is displayed without the appearance animation being executed. The display of the pending display as the final aspect of the appearance animation will start at the position corresponding to the one item. Further, as a shift animation in this case, the newly started display of the pending display is shifted toward the active display area 5F.

(If a new pending memory occurs more than 33ms after the end of the symbol confirmation period for a variable display with a variable display with a pending memory count of 0)
Next, as shown in FIG. 85, a new 1st special symbol pending memory occurs at a timing of 33 ms or more after the end of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 1st special symbol whose number of 1st special symbol pending memories is 0. Let's explain the case. First, as shown in FIG. 85, when a new first special figure pending memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more has passed after the end of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0, the CPU 103 After adding 1 to the 1st special figure holding memory number, subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure holding memory number, and making the 1st holding according to the number of holding memories (1 piece) including the new 1st special figure holding memory. The variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol) is started without executing the lighting control of the display 25A, and based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, the CPU 120 for performance control The first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are transmitted.

As described above, the variable display of the first special symbol in the present embodiment is performed by lighting one LED out of the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display device 4A for 40 ms, and then lighting it at 40 ms intervals. The target LED is changed and one cycle (320 ms) is repeated until all eight LEDs are turned off.

When determining that the production control CPU 120 has received the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending memory number notification command have been received. Then, while starting the variable display of the sub-symbols, the display control unit 123 controls the display control unit 123 without executing the lighting control of the first sub-pending display 151A according to the number of first special pattern-pending memories. 123 to start drawing the shift animation image. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, the movement display (appearance animation) of the pending display toward the position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U is not executed, and Display of a pending display as the final aspect of the appearance animation is started at a position corresponding to the first appearance animation.

As mentioned above, the variable display of the sub-symbols in this embodiment is performed by repeatedly turning on and off the LED constituting the first effect indicator light 152A at intervals of 240 ms (one cycle: 480 ms). .

In other words, in this embodiment, when the number of first reserved special symbols is 0, when the variable display is not executed, and when the demo movie display is displayed as a guidance display regarding production adjustment, as shown in FIG. - As shown in FIG. 86(C), when a new pending memory is generated by the game ball entering the first starting slot, first, variable display of the first special symbol is started. At this time, the CPU 103 updates the count value of the first special symbol pending storage number from 0 to 1 in the starting port switch passing process, and also updates the count value of the first special symbol pending storage number from 0 to 1 in the special symbol normal process executed in the same interrupt as the starting port switch passing process. In order to update the count value of the number of 1 special figure pending memory from 1 to 0, the LED constituting the first pending display 25A lights up (lights up in a manner indicating that the number of 1st special figure pending memory is 1) (do).

In addition, in the starting gate switch passing process, the CPU 103 transmits a pending memory number notification command indicating that the first special symbol pending memory number is one to the production control CPU 120, but in the starting gate switch passing process In order to send a pending memory number notification command indicating that the first special symbol pending memory number is 0 in the special symbol buffer shift process executed in the same interrupt as A pending storage number notification command indicating that the number is 1 and a pending storage number notification command indicating that the 1st special figure pending storage number is 0 are received in the same interrupt, and the 1st sub The LED constituting the reservation display 151A does not light up (lights up in a manner indicating that the number of first special symbols reserved is one), and furthermore, the number of first special symbols reserved stored in the display area 5S does not change. The display is also not updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the CPU 103 sets special symbol display control data for performing variable display of special symbols in the special symbol display control process in the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data (see FIG. By setting "1" or "0" to each bit of the output port DG1 shown in 21), variable display of the special symbol is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 87(D) to 87(F), when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the variable pattern designation command and the first variable display start designation, the first variable display as the sub-symbol variable display is Lighting/lighting out control of the LEDs constituting the performance indicator light 152A is started. Note that the variable pattern designation command and the first variable display start designation are commands that the CPU 103 transmits to the performance control CPU 120 in the fluctuation pattern setting process.

When 33ms to 66ms have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the variable pattern designation command or the first variable display start designation, the demo movie display fades out and then disappears, and the normal background image and decorative pattern are displayed. Ru. Further, in the pending storage display area 5U, the pending display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a completed state without going through the appearance animation (see FIG. 87(E)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(F), in the pending storage display area 5U, a movement display of the pending display to the active display area 5F is started as a shift animation. Further, with the start of the shift animation, variable display of small symbols is started, and scrolling display of decorative symbols is started. Although not shown in detail, when the scroll display starts, the decorative pattern starts moving downward at low speed, then increases to medium speed, then high speed, and the transmittance increases. The display gradually increases and fades out.

In this embodiment, the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is started after the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the small pattern is not limited to this. The decorative pattern variation starting action (not shown) may be started without starting the scroll display of the decorative pattern from the start until the shift animation ends. The fluctuation start action may be, for example, a pre-movement in which a character displayed on a decorative pattern moves or a decorative pattern moves upward before being displayed moving downward.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 88(G) to 88(I), following FIGS. 86 and 87, when the game ball enters the first starting slot during the variable display of the first special symbol, a new reserved memory is created. When this occurs, the CPU 103 updates the first special symbol pending memory number count value to 1 in the starting port switch passage process. In addition, in the same interrupt as the starting gate switch passing process, the CPU 103 does not update the first special symbol pending storage number count value to 0, so the CPU 103 does not update the bit of the output port DG3 shown in FIG. 21 in the display process. Set 0 to 0 and 1 to bit 3. As a result, based on the generation of a new pending memory, the LED constituting the first pending display 25A starts lighting (lit in a manner indicating that the number of first special symbol pending memories is one). Moreover, at this time, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol pending memory number notification command corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol pending memory number is one to the performance control CPU 120.

Next, when the production control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol pending memory number notification command corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol pending memory number is one from the CPU 103, it displays the first sub pending display 151A. The constituting LEDs are turned on in a manner corresponding to the fact that the first special figure pending storage number is 1. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates the display of the first special figure pending storage number in the display area 5S to "1". That is, in the present embodiment, when a new pending memory is generated, the display of the first special figure pending memory number in the display area 5S is updated from a timing later than the lighting timing of the LED of the first pending display 25A. Therefore, the player can visually check the display of the first special figure pending memory number in the display area 5S after confirming the winning of the game ball, so it is easy to understand that the pending memory number has increased.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 89(J) to (L), in the image display device 5, an appearance animation of a pending display is started in response to a newly generated pending memory.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, based on the generation of a new pending memory, it is possible to execute the pending change effect, winning flash effect, button vibration effect, and appearance animation, respectively. ing. Among these, the pending change performance is a performance that is executed from the occurrence of a pending memory until the stop timing of the variable display of the prefetch target (variable display based on the pending memory), and the winning flash performance is the performance that is executed from the occurrence of the pending memory to the stop timing of the variable display of the prefetch target. This is a performance that is executed until the reach timing of the variable display (variable display based on the suspended memory), and the button vibration performance is a performance that is executed for a certain period of time (for example, 3000 ms) from the occurrence of the suspended memory, The appearance animation is a performance that is executed for a maximum of 600 ms from the occurrence of the pending memory.

Each of these effects can be executed regardless of the effect mode A to effect mode D. Furthermore, while the pending change effect, the winning flash effect, and the button vibration effect are all effects that will not be interrupted even if the effect control CPU 120 receives a variable display start designation, the appearance animation This effect is interrupted when the CPU 120 receives the variable display start designation command.

In other words, in the hold change effect, winning flash effect, and button vibration effect, the timing at which a new hold memory occurs during execution of variable display of special symbols with the number of hold memories being N (3≧N≧1) is A timing at least 660 ms before the display execution period of the appearance animation until the next variable display starts, a timing at which the display execution period of the appearance animation is less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display, and a pending memory. When the variable display of N special symbols ends, the performance control CPU 120 issues a variable display start designation command at any timing within 330 ms, which is the display execution period of the shift animation, from the start timing of the shift animation. This is a performance that is executed until the end without being interrupted due to the reception of the message.

In addition, in the above, as shown in FIG. 86(B), when the first special figure pending memory number is 0 and the variable display is not executed, when the demo movie display is displayed as a guidance display regarding production adjustment. An example of the performance operation in the case where a new pending memory occurs due to the game ball entering the first starting slot has been described, but for example, FIGS. 90(A) to 90(C) and FIGS. 91(D) to As shown in 91(E), the menu guide display and the volume/light intensity guide display are performed when the first special figure pending memory number is 0 and the variable display is not executed and before the demo movie display starts. The same applies to an example of the performance operation when a new pending memory is generated by a game ball entering the first starting slot while is being displayed.

(Mode of superimposed display of pending display)
Next, in production modes C and D, a new 1st special symbol is stored until 33ms have elapsed after the symbol confirmation period for the variable display of the 1st special symbol whose number of 1st special symbols is stored is 4. The hold display when storage occurs will be explained based on FIG. 96.

As shown in FIG. 96(A), during variable display, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and a pending display is displayed in the first to fourth display positions in the pending memory display area 5U. There is. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), when the variable display ends, an end animation of the active display is executed during the symbol determination period, and the active display is faded out and hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), when a new variable display corresponding to the pending display displayed at the first display position in the pending storage display area 5U is started, the first variable display in the pending storage display area 5U starts. The hold display displayed at the second display position is the next active display in the active display area 5F, and the hold display displayed at the second display position in the hold memory display area 5U is the next active display. The hold display displayed at the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U is displayed at the first display position, and the hold display displayed at the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U is displayed at the second display position in the hold memory display area 5U. A shift animation display is started in which the pending display displayed at the eye display position is moved (shifted) to the third display position in the pending storage display area 5U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 96(D), if a new suspended memory occurs immediately after the new variable display is started, for example, before 33 ms have passed since the new variable display was started, At the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U, an appearance animation of a pending display corresponding to a new pending memory is started.

Here, the shift animation of the fourth pending display moving toward the display position of the third pending display in the pending memory display area 5U is drawn in the third pending display image drawing area, while The appearance animation of the new pending display that appears at the fourth display position in the storage display area 5U is the fourth pending display image drawing area, which has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the third pending display image drawing area. It is drawn in.

In other words, the pending display that has already been displayed at the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U and has started moving toward the third display position, and the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U. If the newly displayed pending display and is displayed at the same time, the pending display that is subject to the shift animation will be displayed with priority over the pending display that is subject to the appearance animation. Therefore, it can be recognized by the shift animation that the pending display has moved from the fourth display position to the third display position.

As shown in FIG. 96(E), as the hold display moves from the fourth display position to the third display position using the shift animation, the overlapping area with the new hold display becomes smaller, and the new hold display becomes smaller. The appearance animation of the pending display becomes visible.

In addition, in FIG. 96, in production modes C and D, a new first special symbol is not displayed until 33 ms has elapsed after the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the first special symbol whose number of first special symbols pending memory is 4 ends. We have explained the mode of reservation display in the case where 1 special symbol reservation memory occurs, but as shown in FIG. The mode of the pending display in the case where a new first special symbol pending memory occurs before 33ms elapses after the end of the display symbol confirmation period is different only in the display position where the new pending display is displayed. , the other display modes are almost the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Although not particularly shown, in production modes C and D, by the time 33 ms has elapsed after the end of the symbol confirmation period for the variable display of the first special symbol with the first special symbol pending storage number of 1 or 2. Even in the case where a new first special figure pending memory is generated, the only difference is the display position where the new pending display is displayed, and the other display modes are almost the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, in production modes C and D, the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the first special symbol with the number of first special symbol pending memories of 3 ends, and the new symbol is displayed within 33ms until the start of the next variable display. The reservation display when 1 special figure reservation storage occurs will be explained based on FIG. 98.

As shown in FIG. 98(A), during variable display, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and a pending display is displayed in the first to third display positions in the pending memory display area 5U. There is. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), when the variable display ends, an end animation of the active display is executed during the symbol determination period, and the active display is faded out and hidden.

Here, just before the end of the symbol confirmation period, that is, at a timing when it is less than 33ms before a new variable display corresponding to the pending display displayed at the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U starts, a new When a first special figure pending memory occurs, the pending display corresponding to the new first special figure pending memory is not displayed until a new variable display is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the pending display displayed at the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U is transferred to the active display area 5F as the next active display, and the second pending display in the pending memory display area 5U is The hold display displayed at the second display position is the first display position in the hold memory display area 5U, and the hold display displayed at the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U is the hold memory display. At the same time, a shift animation display that moves (shifts) is started at the second display position in the area 5U, and at the same time a shift animation display corresponding to a new pending memory is started at the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U. A pending message is displayed. In this case, the pending display is displayed as the final aspect of the appearance animation without executing the appearance animation.

Here, the shift animation of the third pending display moving toward the display position of the third pending display in the pending memory display area 5U is drawn in the second pending display image drawing area, while The new pending display appearing at the third display position in the storage display area 5U is drawn in the third pending display image drawing area, which has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the second pending display image drawing area. be done.

In other words, the pending display that has already been displayed at the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U and has started moving toward the second display position, and the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U. If a new hold display is displayed at the same time as a new hold display, the hold display that is subject to the shift animation will be displayed with priority over the newly appearing hold display. The shift animation allows the user to recognize that the pending display has moved from the third display position to the second display position.

As shown in FIGS. 98(D) and (E), as the hold display moves from the third display position to the second display position due to the shift animation, the overlapping area with the new hold display becomes smaller. The new hold display becomes visible.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the embodiment described above, when the number of pending memories is N (3≧N≧1) and variable display is being executed, one game ball enters the starting hole and a new pending memory is generated. Although the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIG. 99 as a modified example, when two game balls consecutively enter the starting slot, , if the first and second new pending memories occur just before the end of the variable display, and the appearance animation of the pending display based on these pending memories starts less than 600ms before the start of the next variable display, Based on the first pending memory, the appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U, and the appearance animation is also suspended based on the reception of the variable display start designation command by the production control CPU 120. The display is changed to the final mode, and an appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+2 in the pending memory display area 5U based on the second pending memory, and the production control CPU 120 issues a variable display start designation command. The pending display may be changed to the final mode based on the reception of the message.

In addition, if the first and second new pending memories occur immediately after the start of the variable display, and the appearance animation of the pending display based on these pending memories starts 600ms or more before the start of the next variable display. executes an appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U based on the first pending memory, and changes the pending display to the final state based on the end of the appearing animation. Based on the second pending memory, an appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+2 in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is changed to the final state based on the end of the appearance animation. Bye.

In addition, the first new suspended memory occurs just before the end of the variable display, the appearance animation of the suspended display based on the suspended memory starts less than 600ms before the start of the next variable display, and the second new suspended memory If a pending memory occurs after the start of the next variable display, an appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U based on the first pending memory, and the effect is controlled. Based on the CPU 120 receiving the variable display start designation command, the pending display changes to the final mode, and appears in the pending memory display area 5U at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 based on the second pending memory. What is necessary is to execute the animation and change the pending display to the final mode based on the end of the appearance animation.

Further, in the embodiment, if a new pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0 and the variable display of special symbols is not executed, the pending display based on the new pending memory is temporarily changed to the pending memory display area 5U. 100 (A) as a modified example. ) and as shown in FIG. 100(B), if a new pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0 and the variable display of special symbols is not executed, the appearance animation or shift animation is not executed. The pending display may be directly designated to be displayed in the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the display period of one cycle of the retention animation of the hold display is 2970 ms, the display period of the shift animation of the hold display is 330 ms, and the display period of the end animation of the active display is displayed. Although a mode in which the period is 165 ms is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, the display period of one cycle of the retention animation of the hold display may be an integer number of seconds (for example, 3000 ms, 6000 ms, etc.). Good too.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the display periods of both the shift animation of the hold display and the end animation of the active display are less than 1000 ms, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the shift animation of the hold display The display period of at least one of the animation and the end animation of the active display may be set to 1000 ms or more.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Moreover, in the embodiment, by allowing the game ball to enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the starting winning hole or the normal winning hole 10. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and it becomes easier to control the jackpot game state in which the game ball enters the winning hole more easily than in the normal state. A time-saving state or a variable probability state may be set as an advantageous state as long as it is a gaming state that is advantageous to a player such as the player.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. that encloses gaming media and awards points based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
comprising a storage means;
The performance control means is
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
It is possible to display a demonstration display,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
It is possible to display the demonstration display when the storage means does not store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
If a game medium passes through the starting area while displaying the demonstration display, the display of the demonstration display is ended, and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area. , starting a movement animation for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area from the next switching cycle after displaying the specific display;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images